How To Feed A Loon

  • About Us
  • Recipe Index
    • Appetizers
    • Asian
    • Breads and Doughs
    • Cajun / Creole / Louisiana
    • Breakfast / Brunch
    • Comfort Food
    • Delectable Desserts
    • Entrees / Mains
    • Instant Pot
    • Italian
    • Pizza
    • Rubs, Spices and Sauces
    • Soups & Salads
    • Sides
    • Seafood
    • Southern
    • Mexican / Tex-Mex / Cal-Mex
    • Thanksgiving
    • Vegetarian
  • Videos
    • Recipe Videos
    • Web Stories
  • Work With Us
  • Contact
  • **Premium Access**
  • Recipes
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Soups
  • Recipes
  • About Us
  • Work With Us
  • Premium
subscribe
search icon
Homepage link
  • Soups
  • Recipes
  • About Us
  • Work With Us
  • Premium
×
Home » Recipe Index

Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

August 2, 2023 by Kris Longwell 12 Comments

A person holding a sugar ice cream cone with two scoops of homemade vanilla ice cream on top.

If you’re looking for a dessert that will thrill not only the kids but also every single adult within earshot range, this is the one.

There is something magical about this amazing frozen dessert. This particular recipe is how we remember enjoying home-churned ice cream as kids: light, sweet, and the epitome of summertime goodness. The homemade chocolate sauce puts it over the top.

A person holding a sugar ice cream cone with two scoops of homemade vanilla ice cream on top.

How To Make Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

All you need are a few essential tools and a handful of ingredients to make one of the most beloved desserts of all time.

Give yourself enough time to chill the cream and then for freezing after the churning. Trust us, the wait is well worth it.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, there is a small list for ingredients with the type of ice cream. Another popular type of ice cream is made with a custard base. This version is actually often referred to as Philadelphia-Style.

The Equipment You Will Need

Ice Cream Maker – Our recipe is for 1 gallon (4 quarts). We use the Nostalgia Electric Ice Cream Maker, and absolutely love it.

The Ingredients You Will Need

Heavy Cream – Can also use whipping cream or double cream
Milk – We recommend whole milk. Half and half works great, as well.
Sugar – Granulated
Vanilla Extract – This provides the key flavoring, go with good-quality, if possible.
Ice – Broken into small chunks (bagged ice works just fine).
Rock Salt – If you can’t find this, go with coarse sea salt.

EXPERT TIP: The rock salt brings the temperature of the canister churning against the ice below freezing. You want to use enough rock salt so the freezing will occur, but if you add too much, it will freeze too quickly and be grainy. See the NOTES for recommended quantities for both ice and salt.

A person using a plastic half-cup measuring cup to transfer rock salt into the basin of an electric ice cream maker that is full of ice surrounding a metal canister filled with churning cream.

Tips for Perfect Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

Use Top-Notch Ingredients – Since there are only a few ingredients, go with the best you can get, including fresh cream, whole milk, and pure vanilla extract.

Chill Cream Mixture and Freeze Canister – Don’t skip this step. Although your cream mixture will be chilled already, allowing it to chill in the fridge for an hour helps in the freezing process. A cold canister is important, too.

Follow the Manufacturer’s Instructions – Check the size of your canister and be sure to read the instructions. Don’t overfill the canister. Also, see NOTES for recommended quantities for ice and rock salt.

EXPERT TIP: Though the mixture will be tasty when the machine has churned for around 30 minutes, you’ll want to freeze until solid (3 to 4 hours). After 30 minutes, the mixture will seem a bit slushy. This is normal and will freeze beautifully.

A person pulling a dasher from a metal canister that is filled with partially frozen vanilla ice cream.

How To Serve

As a kid, we remember the canister with the partially frozen ice cream always going directly into the freezer to finish freezing. You can also transfer to containers to freeze. We love our ice-cream freezer containers! These are ideal for storing and for whipping up another batch of ice cream with your beloved machine!

When serving, we recommend letting the ice cream sit on the counter for 10 to 20 minutes in order to thaw, or, you can place it in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.

Place your scoop in a glass of cool water before scooping the ice cream. This makes it easier for the ice cream to slip right off the scooper.

A close-up view of a white dessert bowl filled with several scoops of homemade vanilla ice cream.

Other Amazing Homemade Ice Cream Recipes to Try

We love all kinds of ice cream. Vanilla is always a favorite. But, these other flavors are irresistibly scrumptious, too! You’ll want to try them all!

Strawberry Ice Cream
Creamy Salted Caramel Ice Cream
S’Mores Ice Cream
Blueberry Ice Cream
Peanut Butter Cup Ice Cream

These are all great, and we’ve got even more new recipes on the way! In the meantime, how can you possibly go wrong with a delicious bowl of homemade vanilla ice cream? Yum!

This ice cream is amazing on its own, but wait until you drizzle homemade chocolate sauce and/or warm caramel sauce over the top!

A person pouring warm chocolate sauce from a small glass jar over a white bowl filled with several scoops of homemade vanilla ice cream.

This ice cream conjure amazing memories from our childhoods.

There was (and is) nothing much more exciting, especially on those hot summer days, than to hear the churning of the ice cream maker, knowing what deliciousness was soon to come.

And talk about the perfect topping to pie, cobbler, or cake. This homemade peach pie got even better with a big scoop of vanilla ice cream on top. Dessert perfection!

A slice of homemade peach pie sitting on a dessert plate with a large scoop of homemade vanilla cream sitting on top, just starting to melt.

Ready to make the best frozen sweet treat in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a white dessert bowl filled with several scoops of homemade vanilla ice cream.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

It just doesn't get more classic than churning up classic, simple, scrumptious homemade ice cream. This recipe is old-fashioned, in that it doesn't use an egg custard base. It's simply cream, milk, sugar, and vanilla. Be sure to follow your ice cream maker's manufacturer's instructions. This recipe makes 4 quarts.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Chill and freeze time4 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time4 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 12
Calories: 609kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 4-quart ice cream maker

Ingredients

  • 6 cups heavy cream
  • 4½ cups whole milk
  • 2¼ cups sugar
  • 1½ tablespoon vanilla extract
  • Ice See NOTES
  • Rock salt See NOTES
  • chocolate sauce (optional)

Instructions

  • Place the canister in the freezer.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the cream, milk, sugar, and vanilla. Whisk until sugar is dissolved. Place in the refrigerator for 30 minutes (or up to overnight).
  • Remove the canister from the freezer, and ladle the cream mixture into the canister (you'll probably want to whisk the cream mixture before doing this to help make sure most of the sugar is dissolved).
  • Freeze according to manufacturers' instructions. See NOTES.
  • Once the cream mixture is thick, remove and freeze until solid, 3 to 4 hours, or overnight. Allow to thaw for about 10 to 20 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Half and half can be substituted for the milk. We don't recommend using reduced-fat milk for this ice cream. 
If using an old-fashioned "bucket" electric ice cream maker, you'll want to fill about 6 cups of ice around the filled canister. Then sprinkle on half a cup of rock salt. Repeat until you reach a couple of inches from the top of the bucket. Add another layer of ice and salt if melted down an inch or two. 
The ice cream will keep in the freezer for up to 2 weeks (or longer, but may start to develop freezer burn). 

Nutrition

Calories: 609kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 67mg | Potassium: 253mg | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 1898IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Homemade Peach Pie

July 30, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

An overhead view of a peach pie with a pastry lattice topping all sitting on a baking wire on a wooden cutting board.

This pie is about as classic as they come, and honestly, not difficult to prepare.

Everyone loves a good slice of pie. Especially when it’s made from scratch. There are only a handful of ingredients in this pie, and the homemade pie crust is a must. Of course, this pie is made even better with a dollop of homemade vanilla ice cream. Dessert perfection!

An overhead view of a peach pie with a pastry lattice topping all sitting on a baking wire on a wooden cutting board.

How To Make Peach Pie

As you would probably guess, peaches are the most important ingredients in peach pie.

If you can get your hands on Stone Free, they are really easy to work with (the pit comes out easily), but you have other options, too. See below for more information on that.

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, there are just a handful of ingredients needed for this incredible pie. If you can make the pie dough, it really makes a big difference.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Pie dough – You’ll need enough for two 9-inch pies, one for the bottom of the pie, and one for the lattice top. Store-bought is okay, but homemade is easy and amazing!
Peaches – We get ours from The Peach Truck, but, you seek out the best that is near you. Farm-grown is great. However, frozen will work, too.
Lemon juice – Fresh is best. It brightens the flavor and keeps the peaches from browning.
Sugar – Granulated.
Cornstarch – This helps to thicken the peach mixture once it bakes.
Cinnamon – Ground.
Egg – Lightly beaten, to brush the tops of the pie.
Coarse Sugar – Such as cane or turbinado. Also for topping the pie.

EXPERT TIP: To help with peeling fresh peaches, first make a small ‘X’ with a paring knife at the bottom of each peach. Then bring a pot of water to a boil. Grab a large bowl and fill it with ice water. Add the peaches to the boiling water for about 30 to 60 seconds. Then use a slotted spoon to transfer them to the ice bath. The skin can now easily be peeled away.

A person transferring slices of fresh peaches tossed in a sugar coating from a glass bowl into a pastry-lined pie dish.

Tips for Making a Perfect Peach Pie

The great thing about this pie is it’s not complicated and practically foolproof. But, here are a few tips to make sure you make the best peach pie that will rival the best pie shop in Georgia!

Use Fresh and Ripe Peaches – Fresh and ripe peaches are essential for a delicious peach pie. Look for peaches that are fragrant, slightly soft to the touch, and have a deep yellow or orange color.

Make Your Own Pie Crust – Homemade pie crust is easy to make and tastes much better than store-bought versions. Use a combination of butter and shortening for the best flavor and texture. Use a pastry wheel cutter for an attractive look for the strips of dough on top. 

Use an Egg Wash for a Golden Crust – Brush the top of the pie crust with an egg wash made with beaten egg and a little milk or cream. This will give the crust a beautiful golden color and a shiny finish.

EXPERT TIP: See the NOTES in the Recipe Card for instructions on how to make a beautiful lattice top for your gorgeous pie.

A person adding strips of homemade pie dough in a lattice formation over the top of an uncooked peach pie.

How To Serve

You are going to be tempted to cut into the pie before it completely cools after coming out of the oven.

Just be aware that if you do this, the pie will not have “set” and the filling will ooze significantly, and it will be hard to serve. You can easily reheat individual slices in the microwave before serving. Homemade vanilla ice cream is a must!

We recommend letting it rest for at least 4 hours (overnight is even better), and then slice. The first slice is tricky to get out nice and clean.

EXPERT TIP: You can do this in view of your guest, or out of view: Cut the first “sacrificial” slice. It will still get eaten, but for serving, cutting clean slices after that first slice is removed is much, much easier.

A straight-on view of a homemade peach pie in white pie dish and there is a slice missing, revealing the peach filling.

Other Classic Pie Recipes to Try

There’s really nothing much more festive and crowd-pleasing than a homemade pie. Here are some of our all-time favorites that you and your family will love:

Chocolate Meringue Pie
Classic Cherry Pie
Lemon Meringue Pie
Old-Fashioned Apple Pie
Sweet Potato Pie with Pecan Topping
Key Lime Pie
Southern Chess Pie
Buttermilk Blueberry Pie
Homemade Caramel and Apple Pie

These are amazing in their own right, but right now, isn’t this catching your eye?

A slice of homemade peach pie sitting on a white dessert plate with whole fresh peaches sitting behind the plate.

Folks, there are classic pies and there are classic pies. This is about as classic as they come.

Always a huge hit when served to guests. It’s the perfect dessert for an outdoor BBQ, a wedding shower, an anniversary, or just a fun weekend at home with the family.

And, we can’t stress the following enough: Have ice cream on hand!

A slice of homemade peach pie sitting on a dessert plate with a large scoop of homemade vanilla cream sitting on top, just starting to melt.

Ready to make the best peach pie this side of Savannah, Georgia? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag #HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A slice of homemade peach pie sitting on a white dessert plate with whole fresh peaches sitting behind the plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Peach Pie

Homemade Peach Pie is about as classic of a pie as you will find. Fresh peaches at the height of the season are best, but this pie is so good, you could use frozen peaches, in a pinch. The homemade pie dough is not hard to prepare and truly puts the pie in a league of its own!
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time50 minutes mins
Resting Time4 hours hrs
Total Time5 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 467kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 9-inch pie dish glass, ceramic, or metal

Ingredients

  • 2 pie dough enough for 2 9-inch pies
  • 2 lbs peaches peeled, pitted, and sliced (See NOTES)
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice juice from 1 lemon
  • ⅔ cup sugar
  • 2 tablespoon cornstarch
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon ground
  • 1 large egg lightly beaten
  • 1 teaspoon cream or milk, or water
  • 2 tablespoon cane sugar or turbinado

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare 2 pie doughs (for 2 9-inch pie dishes)
    2 pie dough

Prepare the Pie

  • Roll one of the pie doughs out on a floured surface to an 11 to 12-inch diameter. Gently fold in half, and then quarter. Lift the dough and place it in a 9-inch pie dish. Unfold the dough and press it into the bottom of the dish, allowing the excess to hang over the edge of the dish. Place the dough in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.
  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Add the peaches to a large bowl and add the lemon juice. Use two large wooden spoons to gently toss the peaches to coat them with the lemon juice.
    2 lbs peaches, 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • In a medium-sized bowl, mix together the sugar, cornstarch, salt, and cinnamon. Sprinkle over the peaches and gently stir to fully coat.
    ⅔ cup sugar, 2 tablespoon cornstarch, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • Remove the pie dish from the refrigerator and spoon the peaches onto the pie dough. Use the wooden spoon to spread them out evenly.
  • Roll out the other pie dough into a 10x12 rectangle. Use a pastry wheel cutter, pizza cutter, or knife to cut the dough into strips (1 to 2 inches thick). Create a lattice pattern on the top of the pie. See NOTES for instructions on how to do this.
  • Gently cut away excess dough along the edge of the pie dish and then use your fingers to flute the dough (see video for reference).
  • Add the cream to the beaten egg in a small bowl. Brush the egg wash over the dough on the top of the pie. Sprinkle the cane (or turbinado) sugar over the dough on the top of the pie.
    1 large egg, 1 teaspoon cream, 2 tablespoon cane sugar
  • Bake the pie for 45 to 55 minutes, until bubbly and the crust is golden brown. You may need to cover the edges of the crust with foil or a pie crust protector if browning too much.
  • Remove the pie from the oven and place on a baking rack. Allow the pie to cool completely before serving (4 hours to overnight).

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Two 16-oz frozen packages of sliced peaches can be substituted for fresh ones. Thaw completely, and do not drain. 
The pie will keep refrigerated for up to 5 to 6 days. It will keep on the counter for 48 hours. The pie can be frozen (before baking) for up to 2 months. Let thaw completely before baking as directed. 
Use a pastry wheel cutter to make an attractive design for the strips on the top of the pie. 
HOW TO CREATE A LATTICE CRUST ON TOP:
  1. Roll out the dough to a 10x12" rectangle.
  2. Cut the dough into 1 to 2-inch strips.
  3. Lay half of the strips across the top of the filled pie. 
  4. Fold every other strip back halfway, and then lay down another strip perpendicular across the unfolded strips. 
  5. Unfold the strips back into place. 
  6. Fold back the alternate strips, and repeat to lay down a strip perpendicular. 
  7. Repeat to place the remaining strips of dough evenly across the top, folding back the alternate strips each time. 
  8. Cut away excess dough around the edge of the pie, 
  9. Use your fingers to flute the top edge of the pie dough (see video for reference). 

Nutrition

Calories: 467kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 271mg | Potassium: 192mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 414IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 2mg

Best German Potato Salad

July 26, 2023 by Kris Longwell 11 Comments

An overhead view of a white serving bowl filled with a mound of Best German Potato Salad that is topped with chopped crispy bacon and snipped chives.

We love this Best German Potato Salad for a number of reasons. First and foremost, it’s incredibly flavorful. It can be served warm or at room temperature. It’s a beautiful salad. It’s perfect to serve all year. We especially love serving it at cookouts alongside the best grilled chicken, slow-cooker corn on the cob, and Caprese pasta salad.

An overhead view of a white serving bowl filled with a mound of Best German Potato Salad that is topped with chopped crispy bacon and snipped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥓 The Ingredients

Smoky bacon, zesty mustard, and tender baby potatoes get tossed in a tangy vinegar broth for a German Potato Salad that’s equal parts hearty and crave‑worthy. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for best German potato salad on a grey wooden background including red and gold potatoes, Dijon mustard, stone-ground mustard, sugar, chives, chicken broth, vinegar, bacon, pickles, and onions.

👉 Substitutions and Variations

  • Baby Potatoes (red & yellow): Their thin skins mean no peeling required, or just partial peeling; Yukon Golds or fingerlings also work well.
  • Bacon: Adds smoky depth—substitute with pancetta, turkey bacon, or omit for a vegetarian version (just add a little smoked paprika for flavor).
  • Mustard (two types): A mix of Dijon and whole grain gives tang and texture; swap with spicy brown mustard or German mustard for a bolder bite.
  • Chicken Broth: Enhances flavor—vegetable broth works for a vegetarian option.
  • Vinegar: White wine vinegar is classic, but apple cider vinegar or even red wine vinegar can be used for a slightly different tang.
  • Salt & Pepper: Season generously; a pinch of sugar balances the acidity, and a dash of paprika for warmth.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🇩🇪 Tips and Tricks for Perfect German Potato Salad

  • Cook potatoes gently: Simmer, don’t boil hard, to keep baby potatoes tender without falling apart. Peel some of the skin off so the potatoes will soak in some of the dressing.
  • Slice while warm: Warm potatoes soak up the tangy dressing better, giving the salad more flavor.
  • Balance the tang: If the vinegar and mustard taste too sharp, stir in a pinch of sugar or a drizzle of honey.
  • Crisp the bacon well: Extra‑crispy bacon adds the best texture contrast—save some to sprinkle on top just before serving.
  • Serve warm or room temp: German potato salad is traditionally served warm, but it’s just as tasty at room temperature.

Expert Tip

For the best flavor and texture, partially peel some of the potatoes before cooking—this helps them soak up more of the tangy mustard‑vinegar dressing when tossed warm, making every bite extra flavorful.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make German Potato Salad

A person using a sharp knife to pierce a cooked baby potato on a baking sheet surround by other cooked potatoes.
  1. Step 1: Roast the potatoes at 400°F until tender enough to pierce with a sharp knife, about 40 to 55 minutes.
A person using a metal slotted spatula to transfer cooked chopped bacon from a cast-iron skillet to a plate lined with paper towels.
  1. Step 2: Cook the chopped bacon in a skillet until crispy and then transfer to a paper towel-lined plate.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir chopped bacon and red onion that are sizzling and being cooked in a black cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 3: Stauté the chopped onion in the rendered bacon grease.
A person transferring stone-ground mustard from a small bowl into a silver saucepan that is filled with simmering chicken broth, vinegar, and seasonings.
  1. Step 4: In a different pan, bring the broth, vinegar, salt, pepper, sugar, both mustards, and the onions with bacon grease to a boil.
A warm bacon vinaigrette being poured over a piled of partially peeled and fully cooked baby potatoes in a white serving bowl.
  1. Step 5: Place the potatoes in a serving bowl and pour the warm dressing over them. Toss to coat.
A person holding up a wooden spoon that is holding a serving of Best German Potato Salad.
  1. Step 6: Stir in the pickles and most of the bacon and chives. Garnish with more bacon and chives and serve at once.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • Serve warm alongside classic German mains like bratwurst, German pork schnitzel, or roast pork.
  • Pair with grilled sausages and sauerkraut for an Oktoberfest‑style spread.
  • Enjoy as a hearty side dish at barbecues or picnics—it travels well and tastes great at room temperature.
  • Add to a holiday table as a tangy alternative to creamy potato salad.

Expert Tip

If making the salad ahead, save a little extra dressing and stir it in just before serving—this refreshes the flavors and keeps the potatoes from drying out.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make the Best German Potato Salad ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare it a day in advance. Store it in the fridge and reheat gently before serving, or enjoy it cold or at room temperature.

How long does Best German Potato Salad last in the fridge?

It will keep for 3–4 days in an airtight container. The flavors often deepen as it sits, but the potatoes may soften slightly.

Can I make the Best German Potato Salad without bacon?

Absolutely—just skip the bacon or substitute with a vegetarian alternative. Adding smoked paprika can help mimic the smoky flavor.

What type of potatoes work best for Best German Potato Salad?

Waxy potatoes like red, yellow, or fingerlings hold their shape best and absorb the dressing without turning mushy.

Is Best German Potato Salad gluten-free?

Yes, it’s naturally gluten-free since it’s made with potatoes, bacon, mustard, vinegar, and broth—just double-check labels on broth and mustard to ensure they don’t contain gluten additives.

A close-up view of a mound of Best German Potato Salad in a bowl topped with chopped crispy bacon and snipped chives.

🥔 Other Amazing Potato Side Dish Recipes

  • A white serving bowl filled with crispy roasted potatoes with balsamic and herbs with stems of fresh herbs nearby.
    Roasted Potatoes with Balsamic and Herbs
  • A close-up view of a two rows of fondant potatoes on a white platter and topped with sea salt and fresh herbs.
    Fondant Potatoes (Melting Potatoes)
  • A close-up view of cooked smashed potatoes that are brown and crispy on the edges that have been topped with crumbled bacon, a dollop of sour cream, and snipped chives.
    Best Smashed Potatoes
  • A crispy hasselback potato that is topped with grated parmesan cheese and finely chopped parsley resting in an individual oval baking dish.
    Crispy Hasselback Potatoes

Ready to make the best potato salad this side of Berlin? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a white serving bowl filled with a mound of Best German Potato Salad that is topped with chopped crispy bacon and snipped chives.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Best German Potato Salad

This German Potato Salad recipe is the perfect make-ahead salad. It is great when it's warm, of course, but it's equally as delicious when served at room temp. Perfect for picnics, cook-outs, and any other kind of gathering when a wonderful potato salad is needed.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Roasting Time40 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American, American / German
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 245kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Roasting pan or baking sheet
  • Large skillet for cooking bacon
  • Medium saucepan for simmering dressing

Ingredients

  • 1½ lb baby red potatoes
  • 1½ lb baby gold potatoes
  • 4 strips bacon
  • ½ cup red onion chopped
  • ½ cup chicken broth can substitute vegetable broth
  • ¼ cup white wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper ground
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon spicy brown mustard
  • ¼ cup dill pickles finely chopped
  • ¼ cup chives finely chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Pierce the potatoes once with a sharp knife or fork (this will keep them from bursting in the oven). Place the potatoes on a baking sheet and roast them until tender, about 40 to 55 minutes. (Check doneness by inserting a sharp knife.)
    1½ lb baby red potatoes, 1½ lb baby gold potatoes
  • Once the potatoes are cool enough to handle, cut the larger ones in half and remove the skin from about half of them (the skin will be somewhat loose from being roasted). Place potatoes in a large bowl.
  • Meanwhile, cook the bacon in a large skillet until crisp. Remove to a paper towel-lined plate. Keep the rendered bacon grease in the skillet.
    4 strips bacon
  • Over medium heat, sauté the chopped red onions in the bacon grease until soft, about 4 minutes. Turn off the heat. Crumble the cooked bacon and set aside.
    ½ cup red onion
  • In a separate saucepan, add the chicken broth, vinegar, salt, pepper, and sugar, and bring to a boil. Add the two mustards and the sautéed onions with the bacon grease. Reduce the heat and simmer for about 5 minutes.
    ½ cup chicken broth, ¼ cup white wine vinegar, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon sugar, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon spicy brown mustard
  • Pour the warm dressing over the potatoes and add the chopped pickles, and most of the crumbled bacon and snipped chives (save some for garnish).
    ¼ cup dill pickles, ¼ cup chives
  • Use two large wooden spatulas or spoons to gently toss the potatoes in the dressing. Allow the salad to sit for a few minutes to absorb the dressing.
  • Taste and add more salt, if desired. Top with remaining bacon and chives. Serve warm or at room temperature.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
If you can’t find baby potatoes, you can use larger ones. They will require a little longer baking. They are ready once the potato can easily be pierced with a sharp knife. 
Before baking the potatoes, we recommend piercing each potato once with a sharp knife or fork. This will prevent any of the potatoes from bursting in your oven. 
The salad can be made 4 to 6 hours in advance of serving. Store in a container with a lid. We recommend not tossing with the bacon and chives until just before serving.
Leftovers (which are delicious) will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 662mg | Potassium: 77mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 94IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 0.3mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published April 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2023!

Best-Ever BBQ Shrimp

July 23, 2023 by Kris Longwell 8 Comments

An overhead view of a pile of BBQ shrimp sitting on a cutting board with a small white bowl filled with homemade BBQ sauce nearby.

If you love shrimp and if you love BBQ, you are going to absolutely flip for this recipe.

Grilled shrimp is, of course, fabulous. But we have to say, our Homemade BBQ Sauce is what puts these incredible crustaceans on the culinary map! Perfect for entertaining or an easy weeknight dinner! Serve with Southern Baked Beans and Slow-Cooker Corn on the Cob!

An overhead view of a pile of BBQ shrimp sitting on a cutting board with a small white bowl filled with homemade BBQ sauce nearby.

How To Make the Best-Ever BBQ Shrimp

The great thing about this dish is that you can make the BBQ sauce ahead of time, and then grill the shrimp in a matter of minutes once you’re ready to eat.

The Cajun seasoning adds a nice bump of flavor and then the smoky flavor from the grill is the perfect combination. But just to be clear, New Orleans-style BBQ shrimp does NOT include BBQ sauce. This is a different version.

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you will see, once you get the BBQ sauce made, there aren’t a lot of ingredients required to make the best grilled shrimp in town.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Shrimp – Raw, cleaned, and extra-large. Gulf shrimp is our favorite.
Olive oil – Or extra-olive oil, or even vegetable oil
Cajun seasoning – If you can’t find it, see our recipe for it in the Expert Tip below
BBQ Sauce – Homemade is definitely best, but in a pinch, use your favorite store-bought

EXPERT TIP: If you can’t find cajun seasoning, just get a large bowl, use this recipe to make your own. Keep extra in a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Mix together 1 tablespoon of the following:

  • Garlic powder
  • Italian seasoning
  • Paprika
  • Kosher salt

And then 1 teaspoon of the following:

  • Black pepper
  • Cayenne pepper
  • Ground thyme
  • Onion powder

A glass bowl of large uncooked shrimp that has been tossed with Cajun seasoning and olive oil.

Tips for Perfect BBQ Shrimp

Use Fresh, Large Shrimp – Fresh, large shrimp are ideal for grilling as they hold up well and have a sweet and succulent flavor. Be sure to clean and devein the shrimp before grilling.

Make Homemade BBQ Sauce – This is super important. Homemade BBQ Sauce is easy to make and tastes much better than store-bought versions. It can be made

Don’t Overcook the Shrimp – Overcooked shrimp will become tough and rubbery, so be sure to grill the shrimp until they are just cooked through, which should take only a few minutes per side. Grill over direct heat on your grill. Use heat-proof gloves to flip the shrimp, if possible.

EXPERT TIP: When you prepare the BBQ sauce, you can leave the sauteéd onions in the sauce for a more chunky sauce, or you can press the sauce through a sieve for a smooth, silky sauce. We prefer the smooth version, but that’s up to you.

A person using a wooden spatula to press homemade BBQ sauce through a mesh sieve into a glass bowl, leaving sauteéd onions behind.

How to Serve

Grilled BBQ Shrimp is messy. That’s part of the charm of it.

Be sure to have plenty of napkins on hand. A big roll of paper towels is perfect.

We love to pile the grilled shrimp on a large cutting board or on a platter with a pair of tongs. For a special touch, provide small bowls (plastic works great) for folks to have their own individual BBQ dipping sauce. No risk of double dipping!

EXPERT TIP: Apply the shrimp liberally with the BBQ sauce as it is grilling. The heat will cause the sugar in the sauce to caramelize and make an amazing crispness to the shrimp. It’s okay if the tails char a bit, it adds flavor and looks impressive.

A person using a large rubber brush to apply barbeque sauce onto a row of shrimp that has been skewered and it on the grate of a charcoal grill.

Other Amazing Grilled Recipes To Try

We love firing up the grill and here are some of our all-time favorite grilling recipes that we’re pretty certain you’ll love, too!

Grilled BBQ Pulled Pork Pizza
BBQ Beer Can Chicken
Best Grilled Chicken
Easy Grilled Chicken Wings with Homemade Blue Cheese Dressing
Best-Ever Gourmet Beef Sliders
Grilled Tri-Tip with Santa Maria Salsa
Amazing Lamb Chops
Grilled Oysters with Roasted Tomato Butter
Perfect Salmon Burger

And of course: Best-Ever Grilled BBQ Chicken!

These are incredible in their own right, but isn’t this shrimp catching your eye right about now?

A straight-on view of a pile of grilled BBQ shrimp on a cutting board with a kitchen brush nearby that has been dipped in BBQ sauce.

Barbecue is loved by Americans and folks all over the globe. There is something about that smoky, delicious ritual that makes so many people so happy. Learn about the Origins of Barbecue from The Smithsonian Magazine. It’s pretty amazing.

This shrimp is so deeply flavorful, that we have friends and family who aren’t even big fans of shrimp say they can’t get enough of this BBQ shrimp.

It’s perfect for serving guests for an outdoor BBQ. Make enough of the sauce so you’ll have extra on hand and can make this dish any time of the week! It’s great baked, too!

And remember, it’s a little messy, but that adds to the fun! Have plenty of napkins! Wet-naps are even better!

A person lifting a grilled BBQ shrimp out a small bowl filled with homemade BBQ sauce.

Ready to make the best shrimp on the “barbie” in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a pile of BBQ shrimp sitting on a cutting board with a small white bowl filled with homemade BBQ sauce nearby.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Best-Ever BBQ Shrimp

This truly is the Best-Ever BBQ Shrimp.  It's so easy and so incredibly delicious.  The homemade BBQ sauce is the secret to putting these over the top.  The sauce can be made up to 5 days in advance.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
BBQ Sauce Prep and Chill Time1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: BBQ / Southern
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 516kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Gas, charcoal, or electric grill
  • 4 skewers if wooden, soak them in water for 30 minutes

Ingredients

  • 1 lb extra large shrimp shells removed and deveined (leave the tails on, if desired)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Cajun seasoning
  • 3 cups BBQ Sauce (You'll need about 2 cups for basting, and another cup for serving)

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare Easy Homemade BBQ Sauce

Prepare and Grill the Shrimp

  • Place the cleaned shrimp in a large bowl. Add the olive oil and Creole (or Cajun) seasoning. Stir to fully coat. Place in the refrigerator for 1 hour.
  • Fire up your grill.
  • Add 5 to 6 shrimp on each skewer.
  • Baste the shrimp on both sides. Carefully place the shrimp over direct heat on your grill. Grill for about 3 minutes per side, basting each side liberally with more BBQ sauce. The shrimp is done when it is pink and lightly charred.
  • Serve at once with reserved BBQ sauce on the side. 

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The BBQ sauce can be made up to 5 days in advance. This recipe uses about half of the BBQ sauce recipe.  The extra can be frozen for up to 2 months. 
The blog post for a Creole seasoning recipe, if you can't find any. Most Creole (or Cajun) seasonings have plenty of salt in them, so no need to add more salt, unless making your own. If you are making your own, add about 1 teaspoon of salt to the shrimp when coating with the oil. 
If baking, place in a heat-proof pan (or cast-iron skillet) and place in the middle of the oven with the broiler on HIGH for several minutes. Keep an eye on them, as broilers vary. Don't let them burn! They will be ready when pink, curled, and lightly charred. 

Nutrition

Calories: 516kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 143mg | Sodium: 2853mg | Potassium: 666mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 71g | Vitamin A: 1547IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 136mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in July 2016, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2023!

Classic Cobb Salad with Roasted Chicken

July 19, 2023 by Kris Longwell Leave a Comment

An overhead view of a Cobb salad on a large white oval platter flanked by two glasses of white wine and two gold serving spoons.

There is something just so satisfying about a beautiful large salad. And this salad in particular is about as impressive as they come.

And, of course, many of the components of this classic salad can be made up to 1 day in advance.  It’s easy to serve family-style or tossed and served individually. Serve with the Best-Ever Chicken Salad, Classic Gazpacho, and Spinach Spanakopita for a lunch to remember!

An overhead view of a Cobb salad on a large white oval platter flanked by two glasses of white wine and two gold serving spoons.

How To Make Classic Cobb Salad

As you can see, there are quite a few components to this iconic salad. Fortunately, so many of these components can be made up to a day in advance.

By the way, the history of this amazing salad is fascinating, and it has stood the test of time!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube Channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There are substitutions you make when putting this salad together. But, the following ingredients are classic components of this beloved salad.

For the French Vinaigrette

Vinegar – Red wine is classic and adds just the right amount of acidity.
Worcestershire sauce – Adds even more depth of flavor.
Dijon – Regula is great, but for a much deeper flavor profile, try stone-ground or Country-style.
Garlic – Minced.
Blue cheese – Roquefort is best, smashed into a paste.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.
Oil – Good quality extra virgin olive oil is best.

For the Salad

Lettuce – For the bed of the salad, we used a combination of Romaine and watercress (or arugula).
Hard-boiled eggs – See EXPERT TIP below for how to make perfectly hard-boiled eggs, every single time. This can be done 24 hours in advance (don’t peel them and keep them in the fridge).
Bacon – Cooked and crumbled, this can be done hours in advance.
Herbs – Chopped parsley and chives are perfect.
Chicken – Cooked and cubed, or cooked and cubed turkey. This can be done 24 hours in advance.
Tomatoes – Chopped. We love cutting small grape or cherry tomatoes up. Easy and delicious.
Avocados – Cut into chunks and tossed with lemon or lime juice (to keep it from turning brown).
Blue cheese – Roquefort is great, but Danish or Maytag are good choices as well. Be sure to crumble from a block for the best taste and texture.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to resist the temptation to overdress the salad. We recommend placing the Romaine and watercress (or arugula) in a large bowl and then toss with several tablespoons of the dressing. You’ll need to have more dressing to drizzle over the top of the assembled salad and then to pass tableside, too. A little of this dressing goes a long way (but in a good way).

A person pouring a blue cheese vinaigrette from a small glass jar into a glass bowl filled with chopped Romaine lettuce and baby arugula.

Tips for a Perfect Classic Cobb Salad

Use Crisp Lettuce – The base of a Cobb salad is typically made with crisp lettuce, such as romaine combined with watercress or arugula. Clean the lettuce and then allow it to crisp up in the refrigerator as you prepare the toppings to the salad.

Make the French Vinaigrette from Scratch – A classic Cobb salad is typically dressed with a French vinaigrette, which is made with Dijon mustard, red wine vinegar, and olive oil. To make the vinaigrette, place all of the ingredients in a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Shake vigorously until emulsified. You may need to shake again just before serving.

Use Top-Notch Roquefort Cheese, if Possible –
Roquefort cheese is a classic ingredient in a Cobb salad, adding a tangy and salty flavor. Be sure to use top-notch Roquefort cheese for the best flavor and texture. If possible, don’t use pre-crumbled blue cheese. It is not as creamy as block cheese. If you can’t get Roquefort, look for Danish or Maytag.

EXPERT TIP: To make perfect hard-boiled eggs, simply place the whole eggs in a medium-sized saucepan. Add enough cool water to cover the eggs by about 1 to 2 inches. Bring the water to a boil over high heat. Immediately turn the heat off, cover the pan, and the let the eggs rest for 20 minutes. Remove with a slotted spoon, and then run cool water over them. Peel just before ready to serve.

A person placing a hard boiled egg that has been quartered onto an oval platter with a row of other eggs which are arranged next to a row of crumbled cooked bacon.

How To Serve

As you can see, this salad is truly gorgeous in presentation. It’s perfect for entertaining. For a baby or wedding shower, a festive brunch, a festive lunch with loved ones, the list goes on.

Have all of the components ready to go before guests arrive. Just before serving, place all of the items on the salad in single-form lines. We like to turn the lines a bit to an angle for an attractive appearance.

Pour about half of the remaining dressing all over the top and then let guests use large serving spoons to create their own salad in individual serving bowls.

A person pouring a light-colored vinaigrette from a glass salad dressing holder over a platter of a prepared Cobb salad.

Other Classic Salads Recipes to Try

This Cobb salad is one of our favorites to serve guests, without a doubt. But, these salad recipes are always a hit, too. Beautiful and so flavorful. Give them a try!

Watermelon and Cucumber Salad with Feta
Classic Chinese Salad with Mandarin
Spinach Salad with Warm Bacon Vinaigrette
Roasted Beet and Burrata Salad
Green Bean and Tomato Salad with Scallion Dressing
Heirloom Tomato Salad
Fresh Strawberry and Spinach Salad with Avocado

All of these salads are fresh, delicious, and always a hit when served. In the meantime, isn’t this classic salad calling your name?

A close-up view of a Cobb salad that is lined with rows of chopped avocado, crumbled blue cheese, sliced tomatoes, cubed cooked chicken, crumbled bacon, and hard boiled egg wedges.

There are so many reasons to absolutely love this iconic salad.

When you serve it to guests, you won’t believe the response. It’s so beautiful, it’s practically breathtaking.

But, when you dig into this vibrant salad, you (and your guests) will be beyond impressed. It’s honestly that delicious.

Two medium-sized white salad bowls filled with a tossed Cobb salad both sitting next to a glass of white wine.

Ready to make the most spectacular salad this side of Hollywood and the Brown Derby? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a picture, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a Cobb salad on a large white oval platter flanked by two glasses of white wine and two gold serving spoons.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Classic Cobb Salad

This Classic Cobb Salad has all the ingredients that just go together so perfectly. Serve it family-style and let guests create their own salad, or mix together and serve in individual bowls. The chicken, bacon, hard-boiled eggs, and dressing can all be prepared in advance.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Roasting and cooling time for chicken1 hour hr
Total Time2 hours hrs
Course: Salad
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 436kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs chicken breasts bone-in, skin-on (See NOTES)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Kosher salt and ground black pepper
  • 6 strips bacon
  • 3 eggs hard-boiled
  • 4 cups Romaine lettuce washed, dried, torn into pieces, and chilled
  • 2 cups watercress roughly chopped, or baby arugula
  • 2 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley fresh, chopped
  • 2 tablespoon chives fresh, chopped
  • 2 small avocados peeled, pit removed, and roughly chopped
  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes halved
  • 7 oz Roquefort cheese crumbled (you'll need a little more for the vinaigrette)

For the French Vinaigrette

  • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • Kosher salt and ground black pepper
  • 1 oz Roquefort dressing about 1 to 2 tbsp
  • ⅓ cup extra-virgin olive oil

Instructions

Roast the Chicken

  • Preheat oven to 375°F.
  • Place a baking rack on a baking sheet lined with foil.
  • Brush the olive oil all over the chicken. Liberally sprinkle with salt and pepper all over the chicken breasts. Bake for 45 to 55 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F. Let cool on the rack.
    2 lbs chicken breasts, 2 tablespoon olive oil, Kosher salt and ground black pepper
  • When cool enough to handle, use a knife to cut the meat from the bone. Try not to shred the meat. Cut the chicken meat into bite-sized cubes. Set aside. If not using within the hour, cover and refrigerate until an hour before assembling the salad.

Cook the Bacon

  • You can cook the bacon in a skillet until crisp, or you can cook it in the oven. For the oven method, preheat your oven to 375°F, line a baking sheet with foil, and cook the bacon until crisp, usually about 15 minutes. Place cooked bacon on a paper towel-lined plate. Crumble before assembling the salad. This can be done at the same time you're roasting the chicken. It can also be done several hours before assembling the salad.
    6 strips bacon

Hard-Boil the Eggs

  • Place the eggs in a medium-sized saucepan. Add enough cool water to the pan to cover the eggs by 1 to 2 inches. Bring the water to a boil and then immediately turn off the heat and cover the pan. Allow the eggs to rest in the water for 20 minutes. Use a slotted spoon to remove the eggs. Don't peel the eggs until just before assembling the salad. The eggs can be prepared up to 24 hours in advance (keep refrigerated).
    3 eggs

Chill the Lettuce and Prepare the French Vinaigrette

  • In a large bowl, mix together the cleaned Romaine and watercress (or arugula). Place in the refrigerator to chill while you make the vinaigrette.
    4 cups Romaine lettuce, 2 cups watercress
  • In a small bowl (or do this directly in a jar with a lid), stir together the red wine vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon, garlic, ½ teaspoon salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper.
    7 oz Roquefort cheese, ¼ cup red wine vinegar, 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves garlic, Kosher salt and ground black pepper
  • Transfer to a jar with a tight-fitting lid (if mixing in a bowl first).
  • Use the back of a fork to smash 1 oz (about 2 tbsp) of the Roquefort cheese. Add the cheese to the jar and then pour in the olive oil. Fasten the lid to the jar and then shake vigorously for at least 30 seconds, until the vinaigrette is fully mixed and emulsified. Set aside.
    1 oz Roquefort dressing, ⅓ cup extra-virgin olive oil

Assemble the Salad

  • Shake the vinaigrette in the jar again and then drizzle about ¼-cup of it over the chilled lettuce. Toss to coat the lettuce (it shouldn't be dripping, only lightly coated.
  • Spread the dressed lettuce across the bottom of a large platter.
  • Peel the eggs and then quarter them, lengthwise. In a small bowl, mix together the chopped parsley and chives.
    2 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley, 2 tablespoon chives
  • Adding in rows across the top of the lettuce, add the chopped avocado, crumbled bacon, half of the herb (parsley and chives) mixture, the cubed cooked chicken, the rest of the herb mixture, the halved cherry tomatoes, the crumbled Roquefort cheese, and the quartered hard-boiled eggs.
    2 small avocados, 2 cups cherry tomatoes
  • Drizzle more of the dressing over the top, leaving enough for some to be passed at the table.
  • Top with a little freshly ground pepper, if desired. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube Channel. 
You can also cook the chicken by poaching skinless, boneless chicken breasts in a pot with lightly salted water. Bring the water to a boil and then reduce the heat to low and simmer for 15 minutes. The center should not be pink in the middle and have an internal temperature of 165°F. 
Leftover roasted turkey is a great option, too! 
We recommend using cubed blue cheese. The pre-crumbled is not as creamy. Crumble the cheese with your fingers. If you can't find Roquefort, go with Danish or Maytag. These can all be found in the specialty cheese section (usually near the prepared meats and deli area) in most well-stocked supermarkets.
Toss the cut avocado in a little lime or lemon juice to keep it from oxidizing (turning brownish). 
The chicken and eggs (unpeeled) can be prepared up to 24 hours in advance. The bacon can be cooked several hours in advance. And the dressing can be made a couple of days in advance. Keep everything refrigerated until about an hour before assembling the salad. 

Nutrition

Calories: 436kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 223mg | Sodium: 992mg | Potassium: 1239mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 4107IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 284mg | Iron: 3mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in June 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2023!

Best-Ever Baked Ziti

July 16, 2023 by Kris Longwell 41 Comments

A stainless steel lasagna pan filled with best-ever baked ziti with a portion of it missing revealing the pasta and meat sauce in side the ziti.

There are so many things to love about this Best-Ever Baked Ziti. It can be made in advance. It feeds a lot of hungry people. Leftovers are amazing. But, more than anything, it is incredibly delicious. The homemade marinara sauce is what puts it over the top! Serve it with a classic Caesar salad and cheesy garlic bread for a meal your guests won’t soon forget!

A stainless steel lasagna pan filled with best-ever baked ziti with a portion of it missing revealing the pasta and meat sauce in side the ziti.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 The Ingredients

The ingredients for this dish come together to create an unforgettable, comforting casserole, with many components that can be prepared ahead to save time on busy days. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for best-ever baked ziti on a wooden grey background including uncooked zit, ricotta, mozzarella, celery, onion, oil, marinara sauce, sausage, ground beef, carrots, red wine, and seasonings.

🧀 Substitutions and Variations

  • Protein – Italian sausage is traditional in baked ziti. We love a combination of hot sausage and sweet sausage; however, you can opt for either one. The ground beef can be substituted with ground turkey or chicken. For the beef, we recommend lean ground beef (90% lean) to reduce the amount of rendered grease.
  • Marinara – Homemade marinara sauce takes this dish to the next level. However, quality store-bought will work in a pinch. The marinara can be made days in advance.
  • Cheese – Ricotta is another traditional ingredient. Seek out whole milk ricotta for the best taste and texture. Fresh mozzarella can be found in the specialty cheese section of most well-stocked supermarkets. Bagged shredded mozzarella has anti-caking agents added, and they don’t melt as well. However, quality shredded cheese (in a bag) will be just fine. If you don’t like ricotta, try mixing one egg with 2 cups of cottage cheese and using this as a substitute. It’s delicious!
  • Pasta – Dried ziti can be found in the pasta section of most supermarkets. However, any tubular pasta will work, including penne, elbow, or rigatoni.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

Expert Tip

99% of the alcohol from the wine will evaporate out during the simmering process. If you prefer to not cook with wine, just omit it. You’ll still get a delicious sauce.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Best-Ever Baked Ziti

A person stirring cooked crumbled Italian sausage, ground beef with chopped carrots, celery, and onion with a wooden spatula in a large stainless steel saucepan.
  1. Step 1: In a large skillet, sauté the onion, carrots, and celery and then add the meat and cook until no longer pink.
A person pouring red wine from a small glass carafe into a skillet filled with cooked sausage, ground beef, and a mirepoix in a large silver skillet.
  1. Step 2: Add the wine and cook until almost all liquid is gone.
A person pouring a large amount of homemade marinara sauce from a 8-cup measuring cup into a skillet filled with simmering cooked meat and vegetables.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the marinara and simmer for 20 minutes.
A person sprinkling grated parmesan cheese over shredded mozzarella cheese that is layered on top of a layer of meat sauce in a silver lasagna pan.
  1. Step 4: In a lasagna pan, add a thin layer of sauce, then cooked ziti, ricotta, mozzarella, and a sprinkle of Parmesan.
A person sprinkling grated parmesan cheese over the top of a silver lasagna pan that is filled with an uncooked baked ziti.
  1. Step 5: Repeat and then top with a little more sauce, and then top that with more mozzarella
A person sprinkling freshly chopped Italian parsley over the top of a freshly baked ziti casserole in a silver lasagna pan resting on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 6: Bake until golden (about 50 minutes) and then garnish with chopped parsley. Let rest for 5 minutes.

🍽️ How to Serve, Store, and Reheat

  • You’ll want to allow the baked ziti to rest at least 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This will allow the juices to distribute, plus it won’t be too hot for serving.
  • This is great to just set the pan on the table and let folks serve themselves. Make sure everyone knows that the pan is hot!
  • Leftovers can be stored in an air-tight container with lid for up to 5 days. Or, cover the pan with foil and refrigerate.
  • To reheat, we recommend transferring the desire amount of ziti from the pan to a new baking dish, cover with foil, and bake for 20 to 30 minutes at 325°F, or until bubbly and heated through. Microwaving leftovers works very well, too.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Question

Can I make baked ziti ahead of time?

Yes, you can assemble baked ziti a day in advance, cover it tightly, and refrigerate; just bake it when you’re ready to serve. Also, the marinara sauce and meat sauce can be made several days in advance. They also freeze beautifully.

What type of cheese works best in baked ziti?

A combination of ricotta, mozzarella, and Parmesan cheeses creates a creamy, melty, and flavorful baked ziti.

Can I freeze baked ziti?

Absolutely! Baked ziti freezes well—store it in an airtight container before baking or freeze leftovers, then thaw and reheat when needed.

A large stainless steel lasagna pan filled with a freshly baked best-ever baked ziti surrounded by a couple glasses of red wine and a bottle of wine.

🇮🇹 Other Classic Baked Italian Dishes

  • A white bowl holding classic meat lasagna with another bowl behind it next to a glass of red wine.
    Classic Meat Lasagna
  • A square slice of baked eggplant parmesan being lifted from the dish with mozzarella strands hanging from the spatula.
    Authentic Eggplant Parmesan
  • A straight-on view of a white dinner plate that is filled with two side-by-side spinach cannelloni and meat sauce near a wine glass partially filled with red wine.
    Spinach and Ricotta Cannelloni with Meat Sauce
  • Two Italian stuffed shells on a plate with a layer of marinara sauce on the bottom all sitting next to a glass of red wine.
    Italian Stuffed Shells
A person raising a cheesy serving of best-ever baked ziti from a pan of the same thing.

Ready to make the best baked pasta dish this side of Little Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person raising a cheesy serving of best-ever baked ziti from a pan of the same thing.
Print Recipe
5 from 13 votes

Best-Ever Baked Ziti

This Best-Ever Baked Ziti recipe really is the best ever. Go with quality ingredients and be sure to make the marinara from scratch, and you won’t believe the results. This meat sauce can be made a day in advance and kept in the fridge or freeze up to 2 weeks. The dish can also be made a day in advance and kept in the fridge or freeze for up to 2 weeks. Just let thaw before baking. This is one to serve to people you really love and want to make them happy.
Prep Time45 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Marinara making35 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Italian, Italian / American
Servings: 8
Calories: 624kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Lasagna pan or large casserole dish (9×13, or larger)

Ingredients

Make Ahead

  • fresh marinara sauce or quality store-bought

For the Meat Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped (about ½ cup)
  • 2 stalks celery chopped (about ½ cup)
  • 1 medium carrot peeled and chopped (about ½ cup)
  • ½ lb sweet Italian sausage casings removed, if links
  • ½ lb hot Italian sausage casings removed, if links
  • 1 lb ground beef 85% lean
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 5 cups fresh marinara sauce click for recipe
  • 3 tablespoon tomato paste

For the Baked Ziti

  • 16 oz ziti dried, or rigatoni
  • 16 oz ricotta cheese whole milk
  • 3 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
  • 1 cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped, for garnish

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare the marinara sauce (see link to recipe in Ingredients List)
    fresh marinara sauce

Make the Meat Sauce

  • Heat the oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add the onion, celery, and carrot and cook until soft, about 7 – 10 minutes.
    ¼ cup olive oil, 1 medium onion, 2 stalks celery, 1 medium carrot
  • Crumble the sausage with your hands into the pot and then add the beef. Cook until almost no longer pink.
    ½ lb sweet Italian sausage, ½ lb hot Italian sausage, 1 lb ground beef
  • Season with 1 teaspoon salt and ½ teaspoon pepper.
    Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • At this point, if too much grease has been rendered, tilt the skillet and use a spoon to remove excess fat. Discard safely. Leave a little in the pan for added flavor.
  • Add the wine and cook until the liquid is almost all gone, about 3 to 4 minutes.
    ½ cup red wine
  • Add the prepared marinara and tomato paste and simmer for 20 to 30 minutes. Set aside.
    5 cups fresh marinara sauce, 3 tablespoon tomato paste

Assemble and Bake the Dish

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the ziti according to package instructions for al dente. Drain and set aside.
    16 oz ziti
  • In a lasagna pan (or a deep casserole dish), ladle a thin layer of the meat sauce on the bottom of the dish, about 2 cups.
  • Add a layer of cooked ziti, a little more than a third of the pasta.
  • Top with dollops of half of the ricotta and then 1 cup of the mozzarella.
    16 oz ricotta cheese, 3 cups mozzarella cheese
  • Sprinkle about ¼ cup of Parmesan on top of that.
    1 cup Parmesan cheese
  • Repeat this process again. (You'll want to leave a handful of the cooked pasta and then several cups of the sauce for the topping of the dish).
  • Top with a handful of pasta, then another layer of the sauce, 1 cup of mozzarella, and another ¼ cup of Parmesan on top.
  • Baked, uncovered, for 45 to 50 minutes, until lightly browned on top and bubbly.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley. Let rest for about 5 minutes, and then serve with additional grated Parmesan on the side.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
The marinara sauce can be made several days in advance or frozen for up to 2 months (thaw completely before using). The meat sauce can be prepared up to 3 days before assembling the ziti.
The dish can be assembled and then refrigerated (covered) for several days. If chilled, you will need to add another 15 to 20 minutes of baking. Cover with foil if getting too brown on top.
Leftovers are fantastic, and we keep them covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can freeze leftover baked ziti, but the cheese will lose its creamy texture. We don’t recommend freezing once baked. 

Nutrition

Calories: 624kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 132mg | Sodium: 822mg | Potassium: 610mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2129IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 519mg | Iron: 3mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in April 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2023!

Chinese Noodles with Peanut Sauce

July 12, 2023 by Kris Longwell 20 Comments

An overhead view of Chinese noodles with peanut sauce garnished with chopped scallions and sesame seeds.

This classic Chinese dish is the definition of Asian comfort food.

If you’re in the mood to create a Chinese dinner party at home, these make for a fantastic appetizer, or as part of the main servings. We love to serve them with our homemade scallion pancakes. Such an amazing combination of sweet and savory. And they make delicious leftovers, too!

An overhead view of Chinese noodles with peanut sauce garnished with chopped scallions and sesame seeds.

How To Make Chinese Noodles with Peanut Sauce

Did you ever wonder who invented the noodle? It’s pasta, which makes you think it might have originated in Italy or Europe. Or is it China? Learn more about its amazing history here.

Now that we’ve got that out of the way, let’s make this amazing dish!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

You might think this recipe is full of ingredients that you can only find at your local Asian market. Actually, they are all very straightforward and easy to get your hands on.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Chinese Egg Noodles – Lo Mein, wide or thin will work. Found in the Asian section of most well-stocked supermarkets.
Peanut butter – Smooth and creamy works best.
Honey – Get your favorite top-notch variety.
Soy sauce – Low sodium or regular both work perfectly.
Rice vinegar – Found in the Asian section of many supermarkets, or at an Asian market, or online.
Ginger – Fresh, finely minced.
Garlic – Fresh, finely minced.
Lime juice – From the juice of one lime
Chili oil – Found in the Asian section of many supermarkets, or at an Asian market, or online.
Sesame oil – Found in the Asian section of most supermarkets
Scallions – Thinly sliced
Sesame seeds – Toasted (or regular), for garnish

EXPERT TIP: If you like an extra thick sauce, add only ¼ cup of the noodle water into the sauce when you are processing it. A thicker sauce is delicious, but the noodles become almost gummy after a couple of hours. We recommend adding at least ½ to ¾ cups of water to the sauce.

A person holding up a spoon filled with a peanut sauce from a food processor.

Tips for Perfect Chinese Noodles with Peanut Sauce

Cook the Noodles Until They are Al Dente – Overcooked noodles will become mushy and won’t hold up well in the peanut sauce. Be sure to cook the noodles until they are just tender, then rinse them under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Use Creamy Peanut Butter – Smooth and creamy peanut butter will make the sauce silky and smooth, while chunky peanut butter will create a gritty texture. If you prefer a little texture in your sauce, you can add chopped peanuts as a garnish.

Mix the Sauce Well Before Adding it to the Noodles – To ensure that the peanut sauce is extra-creamy, process it in a food processor until smooth, or vigorously whisk it. This will help to emulsify the ingredients and create a smooth and creamy sauce. Add noodle water to reach the desired consistency (usually about ½ cup).

A person pouring a peanut sauce from a blue bowl into a large white pasta bowl filled with cooked lo mein noodles.

How To Serve

As mentioned, this dish is wonderful served warm, but it’s also delicious served at room temperature.

If chilled, we recommend letting it come to room temperature for at least an hour before serving.

It makes a wonderful appetizer, but it’s also fantastic when served as a side dish to other classic Asian dishes (see below for some amazing recipes).

We serve the noodles with extra chili oil, soy sauce, and scallions for additional garnishing.

A person using two large wooden spoons to lift up cooked noodles that have coated with a peanut sauce.

Other Classic Chinese Recipes to Try at Home

There’s nothing much better than ordering your favorite Chinese dishes at your local Asian restaurant, or when ordering out. But, making them at home is easier than you might think, and truly spectacular in taste and presentation. Here are some of our all-time favorites:

General Tso’s Chicken
Kung Pao Shrimp
Crispy Sesame Beef
Pork Dumplings in Peanut Sauce
Vegetarian Steamed Dumplings
Homemade Egg Rolls
Vegetable Stir-Fry
Orange Chicken (Panda Express Copycat)
Best-Ever Chicken Fried Rice
Broccoli and Beef Stir-Fry

Folks, it is so much fun to make all of these dishes at home. And when you whip up a batch of these noodles with peanut sauce, you won’t believe how good it all is.

A close-up view of an Asian-style bowl filled with Chinese noodles with peanut sauce and topped with chopped scallions and sesame seeds.

We love this dish for so many reasons. It’s easy, comforting, authentic, and can be prepared in advance.

But more than anything, it’s just amazingly delicious.

It is truly one of those dishes that is always a hit with family and friends, even the picky eaters! Who doesn’t love peanut butter, for goodness sake?

A person using a pair of chopsticks to lift up strands of cooked lo mein in a peanut sauce from a bowl.

Ready to make the best Chinese appetizer that will rival your favorite Asian joint? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photograph, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon

An overhead view of Chinese noodles with peanut sauce garnished with chopped scallions and sesame seeds.
Print Recipe
4.56 from 9 votes

Chinese Noodles with Peanut Sauce

This Chinese Noodles with Peanut Sauce recipe is so comforting and easy to make. Wonderful served warm or cold, you can't go wrong here. Make the sauce up to a week in advance! Delicious!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer or Side Dish
Cuisine: Chinese
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 442kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Food processor or bowl with whisk

Ingredients

  • 12 oz Chinese egg noodles
  • 1 cup peanut butter smooth and creamy style
  • ⅓ cup honey
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 3 tablespoon rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
  • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice from 1 fresh lime
  • 2 teaspoon chili flavored oil more, if desired
  • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
  • ½ cup noodle water
  • 2 tablespoon scallions thinly sliced, for garnish
  • 1 tablespoon toasted sesame seeds for garnish

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of water to a boil.
  • Cook noodles according to package instructions and then drain, but save a couple of cups of the noodle water (don't forget to do this!).
    12 oz Chinese egg noodles
  • Blend all ingredients except noodles, scallions, and sesame seeds in a food processor or blender until smooth. Set aside.
    1 cup peanut butter, ⅓ cup honey, ¼ cup soy sauce, 3 tablespoon rice vinegar, 1 tablespoon fresh ginger, 1 tablespoon garlic, 1 tablespoon lime juice, 2 teaspoon chili flavored oil, 1 tablespoon sesame oil, ½ cup noodle water
  • Add the noodles to a large bowl and then toss with the sauce.
  • Serve hot or at room temperature.
  • Garnish with scallions, sesame seeds, and extra chili oil (if desired).
    2 tablespoon scallions, 1 tablespoon toasted sesame seeds

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Be sure to hold on to a cup to 2 cups of the noodle water. You'll want to thin the sauce with it. We typically add ½ cup to the peanut butter mixture, but you may want to add more, for a thinner sauce, or less for a thicker sauce. The thicker the sauce, the "gummier" the pasta will get as it rests. 
If you don't have a food processor, you can bring the sauce together in a large bowl with a large whisk and some elbow grease. Whisk until smooth and creamy. 
The sauce can be made 24 hours in advance. Bring to room temperature before tossing with the noodles, or you can gently warm on the stove over medium-low heat. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge (or on the counter) for up to 3 to 5 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 442kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 823mg | Potassium: 292mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in December 2017, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2023!

Creamy Chicken Florentine

July 9, 2023 by Kris Longwell 37 Comments

An overhead view of a large silver skillet filled with creamy chicken Florentine with a wooden spoon and small bowl of Parmesan cheese sitting nearby.

There are so many reasons to love this dish. It’s easy, beautiful, delicious, and always a hit.

This dish makes a spectacular weeknight chicken dinner. But, trust us, it’s not your run-of-the-mill chicken dinner. In fact, it’s so impressive and so delicious, it’s ideal to serve to guests. We love to serve it over fresh pasta or steamed rice. So good!

An overhead view of a large silver skillet filled with creamy chicken Florentine with a wooden spoon and small bowl of Parmesan cheese sitting nearby.

How To Make Creamy Chicken Florentine

This recipe is not difficult to bring together.

The ingredients are straightforward, and the preparation isn’t complicated.

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, the ingredient list for this deeply flavorful dish is not complicated, or even that lengthy. Many of the items you may already have on hand.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Oil – Olive oil or extra-virgin olive oil are excellent choices.
Spinach – We recommend mature fresh spinach that is washed and stems removed; however, baby spinach will also work. If using frozen, let thaw and squeeze out excess liquid.
Chicken – Boneless, skinless chicken breasts are perfect. If they are too large, cut them in half, lengthwise.
Seasoning – Salt and pepper are all you need
Shallot – Or white, yellow, or red onion – chopped
Garlic – Fresh and minced
Chicken stock – Homemade is great, but store-bought is perfectly fine.
Cream – Heavy cream makes the sauce luxurious, but half-and-half will work, too.
Parmesan cheese – Grated, have extra on hand for garnishing
Lemon – Zest and freshly juiced
Red pepper flakes – A little for a little spice, more for extra spice, omit for no spice at all.

EXPERT TIP: Sear the chicken until browned on both sides. Let it cool and then, if desired, slice or cut it into bite-sized pieces. If it’s still a little pink in the center, that’s okay, it will cook perfectly as it simmers in the sauce.

A person using a wooden spatula to transfer cooked strips of chicken into a skillet filled with a creamy sauce.

Tips for Perfect Creamy Chicken Florentine

Chicken Thickness – Use boneless, skinless chicken breasts that are of even thickness: This will ensure that the chicken cooks evenly and doesn’t become dry or overcooked. You can pound the chicken breasts to an even thickness or slice them in half horizontally to create thinner pieces.

The Creamy Sauce – Allowing the seared chicken to simmer in the cream and broth sauce ensures the chicken will be moist and tender. As the sauce cooks down, it will deepen in flavor.

Add Final Ingredients at the End of Cooking – After the sauce has cooked down and the chicken is fully cooked, turn off the heat and stir in the sautéed spinach, Parmesan cheese, lemon, and seasonings. Be sure to taste to make sure the seasonings are correct (you may need to add a little more salt).

A person dumping sautéed spinach from a white bowl into a skillet filled with cooked chicken chunks in a creamy sauce.

How To Serve

This dish is very versatile when it comes to serving it to family or having guests over.

We often just bring the skillet right to the table and allow folks to serve themselves.

As mentioned, it’s wonderful served over cooked pasta or even steamed rice. If serving with pasta, you can stir the pasta into the skillet before serving for a perfect true one-pot dish.

Be sure to have plenty of extra Parmesan cheese on hand at the table. Grating a block of cheese over individual servings is a nice touch.

A close-up view of a large stainless steel skillet filled with creamy chicken florentine.

Other Classic Chicken Recipes to Try

Chicken is a universally loved protein with so many options for preparing it. Here are some of our favorite chicken recipes that you will love, too:

Chicken Fricassee
Caprese-Stuffed Chicken with Balsamic GlazeCaprese-Stuffed Chicken
Coq au Vin (French Wine-Braised Chicken)
Classic Chicken Molé
Roasted Chipotle Chicken
Chicken and Rice Casserole with Broccoli and Cheese
Roasted Lemon Chicken
Grilled Chicken Kabobs
Chicken and Broccoli Alfredo
Creamy Tuscan Chicken

In the meantime, isn’t this incredible chicken creation calling your name?

An overhead view of two pasta bowls filled with creamy chicken florentine both sitting on a bed of cooked pasta.

If you’re like us, you’re always on the lookout for a delicious way to prepare chicken.

Boneless and skinless chicken breasts are budget-friendly and, when prepared correctly, juicy and flavorful.

This dish is one of our most popular recipes on the blog, and once you try it, you’ll understand why. And, leftovers are absolutely amazing!

A close-up view of a white pasta bowl filled with creamy chicken florentine over pasta with a person grating parmesan cheese over the top.

Ready to make the best chicken dish this side of, well, Florence, Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large silver skillet filled with creamy chicken Florentine with a wooden spoon and small bowl of Parmesan cheese sitting nearby.
Print Recipe
5 from 14 votes

Creamy Chicken Florentine

This is always a favorite when served to family and/or guests. Simmering the seared chicken in the creamy sauce ensures it will stay juicy and deeply flavorful. Serve over pasta or steamed rice!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr
Course: Entree
Cuisine: French / Italian
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 678kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large skillet 12-inch, or larger - or Dutch oven

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • 16 oz fresh spinach washed, dried, and stems removed
  • 6 chicken breasts boneless, skinless, about 2 to 2¼ lbs (See NOTES)
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 shallot chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 cups chicken stock
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • ¾ cup Parmesan cheese divided, grated, plus more for topping
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice from half of the lemon
  • ½ ts red pepper flakes optional
  • 8 oz pasta cooked

Instructions

  • Heat 2 tablespoons of the oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat until shimmering.
    3 tablespoon olive oil
  • Add spinach and cook, stirring occasionally, until wilted, about 3 to 4 minutes.
    16 oz fresh spinach
  • Transfer spinach to a colander and press with a large spoon to release excess liquid. Wipe out the skillet with a paper towel.
  • Pat chicken breasts dry with paper towels and then season with salt and pepper.
    6 chicken breasts, Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Heat the remaining 1 tablespoon of oil in the skillet over medium-high heat.
  • Add chicken and cook until browned, about 4 to 5 minutes per side.
  • Transfer the chicken to a clean platter or plate.
  • To the same skillet, add the shallot and cook for about 2 minutes, or until soft. (If the pan is dry, add a little more oil). Add the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds.
    1 shallot, 3 cloves garlic
  • Stir in stock and cream, scraping up any browned bits, and bring to a boil, then reduce heat to medium-low.
    2 cups chicken stock, 1 cup heavy cream
  • Meanwhile, transfer the chicken to a cutting board and cut it into strips or bite-sized pieces. Add back into the sauce and simmer for 15 to 20 minutes, or until the sauce has reduced by about 1 cup.
  • Off heat, stir in the cooked spinach, ½ cup Parmesan, lemon zest, juice from half a lemon, ½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon pepper, and the red pepper flakes.
    ¾ cup Parmesan cheese, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, 1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice, ½ ts red pepper flakes
  • Adjust oven rack to upper-middle position and heat broiler to HIGH.
  • Sprinkle the remaining ¼ cup Parmesan over the top of the chicken florentine.
  • Broil until golden brown, about 3 - 5 minutes, or less (keep a close eye, broilers vary!). Serve at once over cooked pasta or steamed rice.
    8 oz pasta

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
This recipe calls for about 2 to 2½ lbs of boneless, skinless chicken breasts. If the chicken breasts are extra large (as they often are), you'll only need 3 breasts. Use a sharp knife to split them in half, lengthwise. 
You can cut the chicken into bite-sized strips, or leave them whole. It's a matter of taste.
Be sure to taste the sauce before serving. You may need to add a little more salt. 
Leftovers are amazing and will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. We don't recommend freezing this dish as the cream could break down. 

Nutrition

Calories: 678kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 61g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 200mg | Sodium: 592mg | Potassium: 1076mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 776IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 201mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in February 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July, 2023!

Sous Vide Skirt Steak with Chimichurri

July 2, 2023 by Kris Longwell 1 Comment

An overhead view of a sous vide skirt steak on a cutting board with half of it cut into strips and topped with homemade chimichurri sauce.

If you like juicy, tender, beefy steak, then you will absolutely flip for this recipe.

Skirt steak is traditionally used for beef fajitas. It comes from the plate portion of the cow and is known for its deep beef taste. Using a combination of marinating and then using the sous vide method produces a steak that is literally melt-in-your-mouth goodness. The homemade chimichurri sauce brings it all home. Amazing!

An overhead view of a sous vide skirt steak on a cutting board with half of it cut into strips and topped with homemade chimichurri sauce.

How To Make Sous Vide Skirt Steak

Sous vide is a method of cooking food by utilization of a circulation immersion blender that brings a vessel of water to the exact temperature that you want to cook your vacuum-packed protein (or vegetables) to.

If you prefer, you can smoke, grill, and roast the steak. But, folks, once you go sous vide, you may never go back!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

Here are the tools you’ll need

Sous Vide machine – Known as a circulation immersion blender
Vacuum sealer – Or just a large Ziploc baggie (this really works just as well)
Large pot or vessel – Big enough to hold the sous vide machine, the baggie with the steak in it, and water (see video for reference)
Grill – Gas or charcoal, or a cast-iron skillet (this is for searing off the meat)

The Ingredients You Will Need

Lime juice – Fresh is best
Orange juice – Fresh is best
Oil – Extra-virgin is an excellent choice
Dried oregano – We love using Mexican dried oregano, but regular works just fine
Salt – Kosher and also coarse finishing salt for garnishing (this is a must)
Pepper – Freshly ground
Onion – Thinly sliced
Garlic – Minced
Skirt steak – You may need to cut it in half
Chimichurri sauce – Homemade is best (click the link for an easy recipe)

EXPERT TIP: If using a large Ziplock baggie (which is what we use), don’t zip the baggie up until you’ve slowly lowered the bag with the meat inside into the water. As the baggie submerges into the water, the pressure from the water will help to seal the baggie around the meat. At this point, zip the baggie closed.

A person lowering an uncooked skirt steak in a plastic baggie into a pot of water with a sous vide machine inserted into it.

Tips for Perfect Sous Vide Skirt Steak

Don’t Over Marinate the Steak – Two hours is the perfect amount of time to marinate the steak. If longer, the citrus will break down the tissues to the point the end result could be a little too fall-apart, almost mushy.

Sous Vide at the Correct Temperature and Time – Check the NOTES for what temperature you should bring the water to off of how well (or rare) you want the meat to be at. 1 hour is typical for steak, but we recommend at least 2 hours to get the tough skirt steak extra tender.

Sear Over High Heat – Searing is essential once the meat is fully cooked. Get your grill super hot, or your cast-iron skillet, as you want to create a crust but not really cook the steak much more. See NOTES for more detail.

A whole skirt steak searing on a grill gate over a hot and smoking pile of ashy charcoal briquettes.

How To Serve

Once the steak comes off the grill, you’ll want it to rest for about 10 minutes to allow the juices to re-distribute.

You can make the chimichurri sauce in advance, but just make sure it’s room temperature before drizzling over the meat.

For best results, slice the steak against the grain into ¼ to ½-inch strips. Drizzle the chimichurri sauce down the middle of the sliced steak and then sprinkle liberally with coarse sea salt. Be sure to have extra chimichurri sauce on the side when serving.

A person using a small spoon to spread chimichurri sauce over the top of sliced sous vide skirt steak.

Other Amazing Beef Recipes to Try

If you love a juicy steak as much as we do, you are going to really love these incredibly flavorful dishes:

Beef Tenderloin with Red Wine Sauce
Steak au Poivre
Classic Steak Fajitas
Bistecca alla Fiorentina (Italian-Style Porterhouse)
Grandma’s Swiss Steak
Ribeye with Gorgonzola and Caramelized Onion Sauce
Steak and Eggs with Blistered Tomatoes
Steak Pizzaiola
Grilled Tri-Tip with Santa Maria Salsa

These are all beef perfection. But, in the meantime, isn’t this steak calling your name?

A straight-on view of sous vide skirt steak that has been cut into slices on a cutting board with a thin strip of chimichurri sauce spread across the top of the meat.

Folks, we realize that you probably don’t have sous vide machine and are thinking: “Do I really need another contraption in my kitchen?”

Trust us when we tell you that after you cook your first steak sous vide-style and then sear it to perfection, you will not regret the purchase.

Perfectly cooked steak from end to end. It just doesn’t get more delicious than that! And, of course, the homemade chimichurri sauce puts it over the top!

Two pieces of sous vide skirt steak sitting on a raised chef's knife and topped with a little chimichurri sauce and finishing salt.

Ready to make the best cut of beef this side of Argentina? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a sous vide skirt steak on a cutting board with half of it cut into strips and topped with homemade chimichurri sauce.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Sous Vide Skirt Steak with Chimichurri Sauce

Using the sous vide method ensures your skirt steak will go from a tough, chewy piece of beef to a melt-in-your-mouth deeply flavorful steak that you and your guests will be amazed at. The chimichurri sauce can be made up to 24 hours in advance.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time2 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Sous Vide Time2 hours hrs
Total Time4 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American / Argentine
Servings: 2
Calories: 369kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Sous vide machine
  • 1 Large pot or vessel
  • 1 Vacuum sealer Or large Ziplock baggie
  • Grill gas, charcoal, or cast-iron skillet and stove

Ingredients

For the Marinade

  • 3 limes juiced
  • 2 large navel oranges juiced
  • ⅓ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • 2 teaspoon dried oregano preferably Mexican
  • 2 teaspoon coarse sea salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 medium onion thinly sliced
  • 4 cloves garlic minced

For the Steak

  • 2 lbs skirt steak
  • 1 cup chimichurri sauce
  • Coarse sea salt

Instructions

  • In a medium bowl, mix together all of the ingredients for the marinade.
    3 limes, 2 large navel oranges, ⅓ cup extra-virgin olive oil, 2 teaspoon dried oregano, 2 teaspoon coarse sea salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 medium onion, 4 cloves garlic
  • Place the steak in a large plastic baggie and carefully pour the marinade over the steak. Use your fingers to gently squeeze the air out of the baggie and then zip it closed. Massage the marinade into the meat with your hands and then place it in the refrigerator for 2 to 4 hours, massaging every hour or so.
    2 lbs skirt steak
  • Place your sous vide machine in a large pot with water filled between the "Min" and "Max" lines. Set the temperature to 130°F for medium-rare and 135°F for medium (it will continue to cook once you sear the meat).
  • Remove the steak from the marinade, shaking off excess. Use a vacuum sealer to seal the steak in a plastic bag, or place it in a new, clean large Ziplock baggie. Lower the bag into the water. If using a Ziplock baggie, leave it unzipped and slowly lower the bag into the water. The pressure from the water will push the air of the bag. Once nearly submerged, zip the baggie closed.
  • Make the chimichurri sauce while the steak is cooking with the sous vide machine. Chill until ready to use (remove from the fridge about 1 hour before slicing the steak).
  • Allow the steak to cook in the bag for 2 to 4 hours (it will reach the right internal temp after 1 hour and stay there until you remove the meat. We recommend at least 2 hours in the circulating water to achieve a very tender cut of meat).
  • Fire your grill up to very hot.
  • Remove the baggie from the water and then carefully take the steak out. It will be pale in color, this is normal.
  • Place the steak over direct heat and cook until seared and a crust has formed on the bottom of the steak (about 2 minutes), flip and sear for another 1 to 2 minutes.
  • Transfer the steak to a cutting board and let it rest for 10 to 15 minutes.
  • Slice into½-inch strips, cutting against the grain. Serve with chimichurri sauce drizzled over the top. Sprinkle the coarse sea salt all over the sliced steak. Serve at once with extra chimichurri sauce on the side.
    1 cup chimichurri sauce, Coarse sea salt

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Temperature and Time Guide:
  •                            Temperature         Time
  • Rare                   125°F                  2 - 4 hours
  • Medium-Rare    130°F                  2 - 4 hours   
  • Medium             135°F                  2 - 4 hours 
  • Medium-Well    145°F                  2 - 4 hours
Once you hit two hours, the internal temperature of the steak will not change. However, we don't recommend allowing the meat to stay in the baggie/water for more than 4 hours. 
The chimichurri can be made 24 hours in advance, but we recommend making it 1 to 3 hours before serving. It's best served at room temperature. 

Nutrition

Calories: 369kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 100g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 286mg | Sodium: 789mg | Potassium: 1842mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 438IU | Vitamin C: 112mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 9mg

Grilled Peaches and Caramel Sauce

June 28, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

When peaches are in season, this dessert is a true show-stopper.

Making the homemade caramel sauce may take a little practice, but you’ll get it. There are just a few simple, but important steps in making this incredible dessert, and then be prepared for lots of compliments!

A close-up view a grilled peaches and caramel sitting on vanilla ice cream with homemade granola sprinkled on top.

How To Make Grilled Peaches with Caramel Sauce

First and foremost, seek out the best peaches available. We love picking ours up from The Peach Truck. Check them out, they even deliver. Our peach of choice is Freestone (when in season).

Next, be sure to follow the directions closely for making the caramel from scratch.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you might expect, fresh peaches are the star of this glorious dessert. You don’t need much more than that, other than a little sugar, butter, and of course, homemade caramel sauce.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

For the Peaches
Peaches – Look for “freestone” peaches. They are also called “cling-free.” And do your best to get peaches from a peach farmer. You should check out The Peach Truck. If you can’t find freestone, use a sharp paring knife to carefully remove the pit.
Brown Sugar – Dark or light
Butter – Unsalted and melted

For the Caramel Sauce
Sugar – Granulated
Water – Cool
Butter – Unsalted (not melted)
Cream – Heavy, but can substitute half-and-half in desired
Salt – Kosher

EXPERT TIP:When preparing the caramel sauce, be sure to wait until the sugar water mixture has turned a deep amber color. Then, turn the heat off and add the butter, cream, vanilla, salt. It’s important to let the sauce sit for 15 minutes, then give it a good stir. It should be thick, but not too thick.

A wooden spoon that is being lifted from a saucepan of caramel and has caramel dripping from the end of the spoon.

Tips for Making Perfect Grilled Peaches with Caramel Sauce

Use Freshly-Picked Peaches – If at all possible, seek out a peach orchard and select peaches in the height of the season. If they are still stiff, let the rest on your counter for a few days until just slightly soft to the touch. Try and get “freestone” peaches because removing the pit is so much easier than the “cling” peaches.

Keep an Eye on the Caramel – After the sugar/water mixture has come to a boil, reduce the temperature slightly and stop stirring (or whisking). Allow the mixture to bubble and gurgle until a dark amber color is reached, usually about 15 to 20 minutes. If you remove it from the heat too early, the caramel will be clumpy and grainy.

Grill at the Right Temperature – You want to create a 2-zone heat set-up with your grill (one area with direct heat, and another area with in-direct heat). If using charcoal, let the coals become ashy and no longer flaming. Place the peaches cut-side down over the direct heat for just a few minutes. Then turn over on the indirect heat zone. If your grill is too hot, it will burn the flesh of the peaches.

EXPERT TIP: After spooning the brown sugar onto the buttered peach, brush a little more melted butter on top. This will help to dissolve the sugar.

A person using a silver spoon to place brown sugar on top of a halved peach that is on a hot charcoal grill.

How To Serve

These peaches are definitely best served warm, right off of the grill. Have the caramel sauce ready to go (you can reheat it, if it’ cooled off).

Place the caramel in a jar or bowl, and let guests build their own dessert, or serve it to them already assembled in a bowl or on a plate.

We love to serve the grilled peaches over a bowl of vanilla ice cream and then drizzle the caramel all over the top. The addition of homemade granola as a topping is a wonderful final touch. Learn how to make homemade granola in our recipe for Wild Berry Parfait.

A person using a small spoon to drizzle homemade caramel sauce of a platter filled with grilled peaches.

Other Wonderful Peach Dishes To Try

Peaches are such a versatile fruit and are wonderful in sweet as well as savory dishes. Here are a few of our favorites:

Old-Fashioned Peach Cobbler
Peach Crisp
Caprese Salad with Grilled Peaches
Pan-Fried Pork Cutlets with Peaches
Braised Chicken and Savory Peaches

These are all fantastic, but aren’t these babies calling your name?

A close-up view of grilled peaches with homemade caramel sauce all on a white rectangular platter.

The final sauce, poured over the sweet and smokey peaches is something out of this world.

Practice this before you serve it for the first time.

But once you get it, your guests will never forget what your served them! And don’t forget the ice cream and homemade granola! Yum!

Two white bowls filled with vanilla ice cream and topped with grilled peaches and homemade caramel sauce topped with granola.

Ready to make the best peach dessert this side of Savannah, Georgia? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post if on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a small spoon to drizzle homemade caramel sauce of a platter filled with grilled peaches.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Grilled Peaches and Caramel Sauce

Grilled Peaches and Caramel Sauce are incredible. Seek out freestone peaches, if possible, and find farm-fresh, too. Make sure you set up a 2-zone heat with your grill. And pay close attention to the caramel. We suggest trying a practice run before serving to guests.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American Southern
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 293kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas, charcoal, or electric grill

Ingredients

  • 1 cup caramel sauce
  • ¼ cup brown sugar dark or light
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 6 fresh peaches cut in half and pits removed
  • ½ cup unsalted butter melted
  • 1 cup granola optional, find the recipe in the recipe link

Instructions

Getting Started: Make the Caramel Sauce

  • Before your fire up your grill, make the caramel sauce. If needed you can reheat it just before serving. (Click the link in the ingredients for the recipe).
    1 cup caramel sauce

Prepare the Grilled Peaches

  • Set up your grill for 2-zone heat (1 side with direct heat and 1 side in-direct heat). If using charcoal, wait until the flames have died down and the charcoal is ashy.
  • In a small bowl, mix together brown sugar with the cinnamon.
    ¼ cup brown sugar, ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • Brush the cut side of the peaches with the melted butter.
    6 fresh peaches
  • Place (over direct heat) on the grill, cut side down, for about 3 minutes. Rotate 90 degrees, and cook for 3 more minutes. Keep an eye on them, though, don't let them burn if the heat is too hot!
  • Meanwhile, brush the tops with more melted butter.
    ½ cup unsalted butter
  • Turn the peaches over and move to indirect heat.
  • Sprinkle cut sides with the cinnamon sugar and brush the tops with a little more melted butter. Remove from grill and place on a platter.
  • Serve with caramel sauce drizzled over the top and topped with granola (if desired). Or, serve individually over ice cream, topped with caramel sauce and granola (if using).
    1 cup granola

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If you can't find freestone peaches, carefully cut the peaches in half, around the knife, and then use a sharp paring knife to cut out the pit. The peaches should be soft to the touch and slightly indented when pressed. If they are hard, they need to ripen more on your counter until softened. 
These peaches are best served right off the grill. The caramel sauce can be made in advance and then reheated before serving. 
Though this recipe isn't difficult to prepare, we suggest doing a test run of it before serving it to guests. You want your grill hot, but not so hot that it burns the peaches. Also, the caramel may take a practice run to get it just right. 

Nutrition

Calories: 293kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 155mg | Potassium: 17mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 44g | Vitamin A: 459IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 16mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in August 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in June 2023!

Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone

June 25, 2023 by Kris Longwell 5 Comments

A straight-on view of a glass jar with a handle holding a wild berry parfait with mascarpone and topped with strawberries, blueberries, and granola.

This delightful dessert is refreshing and absolutely delicious.

We love this summertime dessert for so many reasons. First, and foremost, it is absolutely scrumptious. But, it’s also beautiful in presentation, very festive, and can be made in advance! After a BBQ feast of burgers, pasta salad, and baked beans, this is the perfect sweet finish to an amazing meal.

A straight-on view of a glass jar with a handle holding a wild berry parfait with mascarpone and topped with strawberries, blueberries, and granola.

How To Make Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone

One of our favorite components of this parfait is the homemade granola. You’ll have extra on hand, but, trust us, it won’t last long. It’s good on so many things! (think ice cream and yogurt).

Assemble and keep in the fridge until ready to serve.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Go with the best looking fruit you can get your hands on. Frozen will work in a pinch. Fresh is definitely best.

Here Is What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

For the Granola:

Rolled oats – Also called “Old Fashioned”
Nuts – Pecan or walnuts, roughly chopped
Coconut – Shredded, sweetened
Brown sugar – Light or dark
Maple syrup – Pure, not pancake syrup
Oil – Vegetable
Cinnamon – Ground

For the Parfait:

Orange juice – Freshly squeezed is best
Honey – Go with good-quality
Sugar – Granulated
Berries – Strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries are our favorites
Mascarpone cheese – Found in the specialty cheese section of most supermarkets, cream cheese is a fine substitution
Yogurt – Vanilla adds wonderful flavor

EXPERT TIP: You can make the granola up to several days in advance. After you’ve baked the granola, let is cool completely in the baking pan then transfer it to a container with a tight-fitting lid.

A close-up view of a pan that is filled with homemade granola and a wooden spatula inserted into the middle of it.

Tips for Perfect Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone

Make the Granola – We can’t stress this enough. Homemade granola is so easy to make and the taste and texture it adds to the parfait is key to making this dish extra special

Use Fresh Berries – Definitely go with fresh berries, if at all possible. When selecting the produce, inspect it closely and check the date is was packed. Fresh fruit can go bad quickly, even in the packaging.

Chill the Parfait – This parfait is delicious served room temperature, but we think it’s even better when it’s nicely chilled. Especially as a refreshing dessert on a hot and sultry summer day.

EXPERT TIP: After pouring the dressing over the fruit, and then gently tossing it, you’ll want to rest in the refrigerator for at least 15 minutes in order to let the fruit to release some delicious liquid. You can cover the bowl with plastic wrap and let it chill for up to 2 hours.

A person pouring an orange-honey dressing from a small jar into a large bowl filled with fresh cut fruit.

Other Fruit Recipes to Try

Most everyone loves juicy, sweet, and delicious fruit. These recipes all star fruit in ways that you and your family are going to love. These are some of our favorites:

Summer Fruit Salad
Classic Fruit Tart
Old-Fashioned Peach Cobbler
Peach Crisp
Strawberry Pavlova
Homemade Blueberry Pop Tarts
Classic Cherry Pie
Raspberry Linzer Bars
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Basil and Feta

These are all so wonderful. But, in the meantime, isn’t this calling your name?

An overhead view of a glass jar holding a full serving of wild berry parfait with mascarpone.

Folks, this is no-fail summertime dessert that you and your family are going to fall in love with.

The recipe can easily be doubled or tripled to feed a crowd. Or, go with small vessels to serve more!

The red, white, and blue colors make it a perfect Fourth of July dessert. No matter what, it’s guaranteed to be a crowd favorite!

A spoon holding up a serving of fresh fruit, Mascarpone and yogurt sauce, and homemade granola.

Ready to make the best summertime dessert on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon

A straight-on view of a glass jar with a handle holding a wild berry parfait with mascarpone and topped with strawberries, blueberries, and granola.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone

Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone is so refreshing and so good. Serve in a Bell or Mason jar for easy transport and fun presentation. The homemade granola puts it over the top! So good! (double recipe to serve 8 to 10 people)
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Granola Preparation (can be done in advance)1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 396kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Jars for serving

Ingredients

For the Granola

  • Vegetable oil for greasing the pan
  • 1½ cups rolled oats aka: Old Fashioned
  • 1 cup pecans roughly chopped, or walnuts
  • ½ cup sweetened coconut flakes
  • ¼ cup brown sugar light or dark
  • ¼ cup maple syrup pure
  • ¼ cup vegetable oil plus more for greasing the pan
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon ground

For the Parfait

  • 4 tablespoon orange juice freshly squeezed from 2 oranges
  • 2 tablespoon honey
  • ¼ cup sugar
  • 4 cups strawberries hulled and sliced
  • 1 cup blueberries
  • 1 cup raspberries
  • 8 oz Mascarpone cheese room temperature
  • 8 oz Vanilla yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 2 cups granola

Instructions

Do Ahead - Homemade Granola

  • Preheat oven to 300°F.
  • Liberally grease a baking sheet with vegetable oil.
    Vegetable oil
  • Add the oats, pecans, and coconut to the pan and use a spatula to mix it all together.
    1½ cups rolled oats, 1 cup pecans, ½ cup sweetened coconut flakes
  • In a small bowl, whisk together the brown sugar, maple syrup, oil, and cinnamon. Pour over the oats mixture and use a spatula and your hands to coat completely.
    ¼ cup brown sugar, ¼ cup maple syrup, ¼ cup vegetable oil, 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • Place the pan in the oven and bake for about 35 to 40 minutes, stirring every ten minutes. Once the granola is somewhat crisp and lightly golden, remove it from the oven and let the granola cool completely in the pan. If not using immediately, place it n a container with a tight-fitting lid (no need to refrigerate).

Assemble the Parfait

  • In a bowl, whisk together orange juice, honey, and sugar.
    4 tablespoon orange juice, 2 tablespoon honey, ¼ cup sugar
  • Gently fold in fruit. Cover with plastic wrap and chill in the refrigerator for 15 minutes, or up to 2 hours.
    4 cups strawberries, 1 cup blueberries, 1 cup raspberries
  • In another bowl, whisk together Mascarpone, yogurt, and sugar until smooth.
    8 oz Mascarpone cheese, 8 oz Vanilla yogurt, 1 teaspoon sugar
  • In a serving glass (such as a Bell or Mason jar), add a layer of the fruit, and then a layer of the Mascarpone sauce, a layer of the granola. Top with another layer of Mascarpone, and then fruit. Garnish with a dollop of Mascarpone and a sprinkling of granola.
    2 cups granola
  • Repeat for remaining servings. Serve at once, or chill in the refrigerator for up to 8 hours.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The granola can be made up to 5 days in advance. You will have extra granola left over. It's amazing on ice cream, yogurt, and on its own. 
The recipe can easily be doubled or tripled to feed a crowd. The parfaits can be assembled up to 8 hours in advance. Keep chilled in the fridge until ready to serve. 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 2 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 396kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 498mg | Fiber: 16g | Sugar: 86g | Vitamin A: 915IU | Vitamin C: 105mg | Calcium: 337mg | Iron: 6mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published April 2014, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and fabulous new video in June 2023.

Classic Fruit Tart

June 25, 2023 by Kris Longwell 1 Comment

An overhead view of a summer fruit tart that is sitting on a circular white serving plate.

Nothing spells the joys of summer much better than this gorgeous tart.

If you’re looking for a summertime dessert to serve that is sure to impress, this is the recipe for you. A slightly sweet crust, topped with a vanilla custard and amazing fresh fruit is a combination that your guests will never forget. This gives our Tomato Tart with Fresh Corn and Herbs a run for the money!

An overhead view of a summer fruit tart that is sitting on a circular white serving plate.

How To Make a Classic Fruit Tart

This tart is festive in appearance, but the taste is truly spectacular.

It can be made in advance of serving, which makes it an ideal dessert to bring to an outdoor BBQ, a shower, or any time you’re in need of a wonderful dessert.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There are three main components to this tart. The tart crust, the vanilla custard, and then, of course, the fresh fruit.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

For the Sweet Tart Pastry:
Egg yolk – Room temperature
Water – Ice cold
Vanilla extract – Madagascar is a great option
Flour – All-purpose
Sugar – Granulated
Salt – Kosher
Butter – Unsalted, cube, ice cold

For the Vanilla Custard:
Milk – Whole
Egg yolks – Room temperature, if possible
Sugar – Granulated
Cornstarch
Salt – Kosher
Vanilla extract – Go with a good-quality brand, if possible

For the Fruit Topping:
Mango – Peeled and cut into strips
Strawberries – Hulled and cut into strips, or halved
Raspberries – Can substitute blackberries
Kiwi – Peeled and cut into slices
Blueberries – Fresh is definitely the best
Apricot jam – For a nice glaze

EXPERT TIP: After tempering the eggs, you’ll want to cook the mixture on medium-low heat, otherwise, the custard could seize up on you and become too thick and lumpy. If this starts to happen, remove the pan immediately from the stove and stir vigorously until smooth. Chill the custard completely before smoothing over the tart crust.

A person using the back of a metal spoon to smooth vanilla custard in a tart pastry shell.

Tips for Making a Perfect Fruit Tart

Make the Crust – You could go with store-bought pie dough, but making this slightly sweet tart crust from scratch puts the tart over the top.

Cool the Custard Completely – After you’ve prepared the custard, it’s important to let it cool completely in the refrigerator. To keep it from forming a film, press plastic wrap over the surface of the custard.

Chill the Tart – You can serve the tart as soon as you’ve assembled it, but we recommend letting it chill in the fridge for about 1 hour before serving. If making in advance, keep the tart covered and in the fridge until ready to serve.

A person adding sliced strawberries on top of custard that is in a tart pastry crust.

Other Amazing Fruit Recipes To Try

Fruit is one of Mother Nature’s most beautiful, delicious, and healthy gifts to us. Here are some of our favorite recipes starring beautiful fruit:

Summer Fruit Salad
Strawberry Pavlova
Wild Berry Bread Pudding with Orange Sauce
Old-Fashioned Peach Cobbler
Grilled Peaches with Caramel Sauce
Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone
Classic Cheery Pie
Homemade Blueberry Pop Tarts
Raspberry Linzer Bars

These are all spectacular in their own way. Isn’t this incredible fruit tart calling your name?

A close-up view of a fruit tart that has layers of sliced mango, strawberries, kiwi, and blueberries.

There is honestly so much to love about this glorious dessert.

It is one of those presentations that always generates lots and lots of “oohs” and “ahs.”

The crust and custard can be made several hours in advance, and then the assembly is a snap! Summer never tasted so good!

A close-up view of a summer fruit tart next to a stack of dessert plates.

Ready to make the very best summertime dessert in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

classic fruit tart on floral place mat
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Fruit Tart

This Classic Fruit Tart is so gorgeous in presentation, only surpassed in appearance by its taste. The sweet tart crust is flaky and buttery, and the vanilla custard is so smooth and luxurious. And then of course the fresh fruit just couldn't be better.  Perfect for entertaining. 
Prep Time45 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Resting Time and Cooling Time3 hours hrs
Total Time4 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 402kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9-inch part pan

Ingredients

Sweet Tart Dough

  • 1 large egg yolk
  • 2 tablespoon ice water
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1¼ cups all-purpose flour
  • ⅓ cup granulated sugar
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup unsalted butter 1 stick, cubed, chilled

Vanilla Custard

  • 1½ cups whole milk
  • 4 large egg yolks
  • ⅓ cup granulated sugar
  • 3 tablespoon cornstarch
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

Fruit Tart

  • 1 mango peeled, cut into strips
  • 2 cups strawberries hulled and cut in half or into slices
  • 1 cup raspberries
  • 2 kiwis peeled, cut into ¼-inch sliced
  • ½ cup blueberries
  • ½ cup apricot preserves or jam

Instructions

Make the Sweet Tart Crust

  • In a medium bowl, gently beat together the egg yolks with the water and vanilla and set aside.
    1 large egg yolk, 2 tablespoon ice water, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • In a stand mixer with the paddle attachment, stir together the flour, sugar, and salt in the mixer bowl.  Add the butter and mix on low speed until the texture looks like small pebbles.  (If doing this by hand, use the backs of two forks, or a pastry cutter, in a large bowl containing the flour/sugar/salt mixture).
    1¼ cups all-purpose flour, ⅓ cup granulated sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt, ½ cup unsalted butter
  • Add the egg mixture and mix together until just starting to pull together.  Don't worry about forming into a ball, but if it's just too crumbly, add very small drops of water, until it just starts to come together.
  • Transfer the dough to a lightly floured work surface and press into a disk (resist using your hands too much, because you want the butter to stay as cold as possible).  Using a lightly floured rolling pin, roll to about a 12-inch round, gently turning and dusting with flour a couple of times.  
  • Fold the dough round in half and very carefully place it into a 9 to 9 ½-inch tart pan (preferably with a removable bottom).  Unfold and gently press into the sides and bottom of the pan.  Trim away excess dough that is hanging over the edges.  
  • Place the tart shell in the refrigerator for 30 minutes to an hour, to firm up.
  • After the shell has been chilling for 15 minutes, preheat the oven to 375°F.
  • Remove the tart shell from the fridge and place a piece of parchment paper over the dough, enough so that about 2 inches are hanging over the edges.  Fill the tart shell with pie weights, dried rice, or dried beans.
  • Bake for 20 minutes and then remove from the oven and carefully remove the parchment paper with weights.  Return to the oven for another 5 to 10 minutes, until lightly golden brown.  Place on rack to cool completely.

Make the Vanilla Custard

  • In a medium-sized saucepan, heat the milk over medium heat until bubbles just start to appear on the edges of the pan.  Remove from heat.
    1½ cups whole milk
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the egg yolks and sugar until lighter in color. Add the cornstarch and salt and whisk until incorporated.
    4 large egg yolks, ⅓ cup granulated sugar, 3 tablespoon cornstarch, ¼ teaspoon salt
  • Slowly pour half of the warm milk into the egg yolk mixture while whisking constantly (this prevents the eggs from curdling).  
  • Whisk in the remainder of the warm milk and then return back to the saucepan. Cook over medium heat, whisking constantly, until it has become the texture of pudding, about 5 to 7 minutes.
  • Transfer the custard into a bowl and stir in the vanilla.
    1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Cover the custard with plastic wrap and gently press onto the wrap to form a seal.  Place in the refrigerator until completely chilled, about 1 to 2 hours. 

Assemble and Finish the Tart

  • To assemble the tart, remove the chilled custard from the fridge, and give it a good stir with a spoon.
  • Spoon the custard into the bottom of the cooled tart shell and spread evenly.  
  • Arrange the mango in an overlapping ring around the edge of the tart.  Place the strawberries, cut side down, in a second ring inside the first, then arrange the raspberries in a third ring. Overlap the kiwi in a fourth ring and fill the hole in the center with the blueberries.
    1 mango, 2 cups strawberries, 1 cup raspberries, 2 kiwis, ½ cup blueberries
  • Meanwhile, heat the apricot preserves (or jam) in a small saucepan over low heat until liquified.  If chunky, strain it into a small bowl.  Brush a thin coating of the preserves all over the top of the fruit.
    ½ cup apricot preserves
  • If your tart pan has a removable bottom, gently lift the tart from the sides. Serve at room temperature. 

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If using a tart pan with a removable bottom, but sure to always lift (or move) the pan by gripping the sides. If you lift from the bottom, the bottom pan will separate from the sides and could ruin your tart. 
The tart can be made up to 12 hours before serving. Keep covered in the refrigerator. 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. The tart can be frozen but runs the risk of the custard cracking. 

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 151mg | Sodium: 178mg | Potassium: 291mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 926IU | Vitamin C: 54mg | Calcium: 101mg | Iron: 2mg

 

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in June 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and a fabulous new video in June 2023!

Summer Fruit Salad

June 25, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

A large glass filled with summer fruit salad

This salad is everything that is good about summer in one dish.

If you’re looking for a vibrant, fruit-forward salad that is beautiful and delicious, this is the one for you. Serve this alongside the best-ever potato salad, classic pasta salad, homemade coleslaw, and your favorite grilled meats for an outdoor BBQ to remember!

A large glass filled with summer fruit salad

How To Make Summer Fruit Salad

This is one of those salads that folks go back for multiple times.

Give yourself enough time to prep the fruit and then assembly is quick and easy.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The sky is the limit with this incredible salad. You really can’t go wrong with whichever fruit you choose.

Fruit for the Salad

Oranges – Cut into bite-size pieces. You could also use Mandarin
Kiwis – Peeled and cut into slices, and then halved
Strawberries – Remove the stems, cut away the white parts, and slice into thick portions
Berries – We love a combination of raspberries, blueberries, and blackberries
Pineapple – Fresh is best, but canned (and then drained) will work in a pinch
Mango – Cut away the skin and then carefully cut pieces away from the tough center
Grapes – Seedless, red, green, or a combination of both

For the Dressing

Citrus – Zest a lemon and lime, and then juice each of them
Honey – Room temperature
Orange juice – Freshly squeezed is best
Cointreau (Orange liqueur) – Optional, for adults only

For the Topping

Coconut – Shredded, sweetened, toasted

An assortment of berries for summer fruit salad

Tips for Making Perfect Summer Fruit Salad

Fresh is Best – Use a variety of fresh, ripe summer fruits such as berries, melons, and stone fruits for a colorful and flavorful salad. Try to avoid canned or frozen fruits, if possible.

Add a “Crunch” to the Salad – Toasted sweetened, shredded coconut adds an amazing taste and texture to the salad. Don’t skip this, but add just before serving.

Chill the Fruit Salad – The salad can be made an hour or two before serving, if desired. It’s definitely best served chilled. However, we don’t recommend assembling the salad over two hours before serving.

EXPERT TIP: We can’t express enough how much the toasted coconut adds to the “wow” factor of this salad. Be very careful when toasting the coconut, however. Use a spatula to move the coconut around often while it’s toasting. Once it starts to turn a light brown, you’ll be very close. Be careful, it can go from light brown to burnt in a very short amount of time.

Toasted coconut for summer fruit salad

How To Serve

This salad can be served in individual servings or in a large bowl, family style.

After letting the salad chill for up to an hour in the refrigerator, we love to transfer it to a large trifle, and then top with the toasted coconut.

If there is an excess of liquid, you can tip the bowl over a sink and let some of the liquid pour out. Leave a bowl of the toasted coconut on the side, so guests can add more, if desired.

A glass trifle filled with a summer fruit salad topped with toasted coconut sitting on a table near a window.

Other Fruit Recipes To Try

When fresh fruit is in season, there are so many ways to highlight them in amazing recipes. Here are some of our favorites that we’re sure you and your family will love, as well.

Classic Fruit Tart
Old-Fashioned Peach Cobbler
Best-Ever Peach Crisp
Caprese Salad with Grilled Peaches
Wild Berry Parfait with Mascarpone
Classic Cherry Pie
Blueberry Cobbler
Strawberry Pavlova
Raspberry Linzer Bars

These are all amazing, without a doubt. But, isn’t this salad calling your name?

Dressing pouring onto a bowl of fruit for summer fruit salad.

Make this salad a few hours before you are serving it, or make it right at the table.

No matter what, this Summer Fruit Salad will be the talk of the town when you serve this at your next summertime gathering!

It is truly the most epic summer salad. You will be the star of the BBQ when you serve this!

A large glass of summer fruit salad with a fork stuck in it.

Ready to make the best fruit salad in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon

A glass trifle filled with a summer fruit salad topped with toasted coconut sitting on a table near a window.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Summer Fruit Salad

This Summer Fruit Salad is so delicious and refreshing and so easy to put together.  The acid from the lemon and the lime keeps the fruit and berries fresh for hours and keep them from oxidizing and turning brown.  The toasted coconut is the perfect addition and the dressing is sublime. 
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Salad, Side
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 162kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • ½ cup sweetened coconut flakes

For the Dressing

  • 1 lemon
  • 1 lime
  • ⅓ cup honey
  • 2 tablespoon orange juice fresh, from 1 orange
  • 1 tablespoon Cointreau optional

For the Salad

  • 2 oranges peeled, cut into bite-size pieces
  • 2 kiwis peeled and sliced
  • 1 cup strawberries hulled and sliced
  • 1 cup raspberries
  • 1 cup blueberries
  • 1 cup blackberries
  • 1 cup pineapple cut into chunks
  • 1 mango peeled, and roughly chopped
  • 1 cup seedless grapes

Instructions

  • Toast the coconut flakes and set aside to cool.
    ½ cup sweetened coconut flakes
  • Zest the lemon and lime and add to a small bowl. Juice the lemon and the lime and add to the zest.
    1 lemon, 1 lime
  • Stir in the honey, orange juice, and Cointreau (if using) and mix until combined.
    ⅓ cup honey, 2 tablespoon orange juice, 1 tablespoon Cointreau
  • Place the fruit in a large bowl and then pour the sauce over the fruit.  Gently mix until all the fruit is coated. 
    2 oranges, 2 kiwis, 1 cup strawberries, 1 cup raspberries, 1 cup blueberries, 1 cup blackberries, 1 cup pineapple, 1 mango, 1 cup seedless grapes
  • Top with toasted coconut and serve, or cover and chill for up to 1 hour (2 hours max).

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. (Video to come). 
Use any variety of fruits that you desire. We highly recommend fresh fruit. Canned or frozen can be substituted in a pinch, but the freshness (and overall taste) won't be nearly as good as fresh. 
Watch the coconut as you are toasting it. Once it starts to turn light brown, it will be ready within a very short amount of time. This can be done up to 24 hours in advance.
The salad is best served immediately, or within 1 hour (after being chilled). It will stay delicious for hours. Give it a stir every now and then. And have extra toasted coconut on hand. 

Nutrition

Calories: 162kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 18mg | Potassium: 326mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 457IU | Vitamin C: 86mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published July 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and a fabulous new video in June 2023!

Elote (Easy Mexican Street Corn)

June 21, 2023 by The Loon 3 Comments

A row six ears of Mexican street corn, eloté, resting on sheets of brown paper with lime wedges scattered around them.

Elote is a popular street food originating in the beautiful country of Mexico. It goes perfectly alongside Grilled Chicken, Slow-Cooker BBQ Ribs, and Gourmet Beef Sliders. Exploding with flavor and is so easy to prepare. Beautiful, festive, and so delicious!

A row six ears of Mexican street corn, eloté, resting on sheets of brown paper with lime wedges scattered around them.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌽 The Ingredients

Simple, fresh ingredients come together in elote to create an incredible taste sensation bursting with bold, savory, and tangy flavors. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for eloté, Mexican street corn, on a wooden grey background including ears of corn in their husks, cilantro, cheese, mayonnaise, cream, seasonings, and limes.

👉 Substitutions and Variations

  • Corn – Fresh is always best; however, if you can’t get fresh ears of corn, you can go with frozen. Allow it to thaw completely before grilling it. We leave the husks on for the initial grilling, but you can remove them completely before cooking them, if desired.
  • Cream – Mexican crema can be found in the dairy section of many well-stocked supermarkets or at Hispanic markets. Sour cream mixed with a few dashes of cream (half and half or heavy cream) is a perfect substitution.
  • Cheese – Cotija can be found in the specialty cheese section, or the dairy section of many supermarkets, or at Hispanic markets. Any crumbly cheese will work, such as Mexican queso, feta, or even grated Parmesan.
  • Flavor enhancers – A sprinkling of cayenne on the corn just before serving is traditional, but can be omitted if you want no spice. Fresh cilantro and freshly squeezed lime are essential for the classic flavor.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Elote (Mexican Street Corn)

A person using a thin strip of a corn husk to tie together the entire husk at the end of an ear of corn on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Pull the husks back, remove the silk, and then seal with a string or a strip of husk.
A person whisking a cream and Cotija cheese mixture in a small glass bowl on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: In a bowl, mix together the cream, mayonnaise, Cotija, cayenne, lime juice, and salt.
A row of five ears of corn that still have the husks on that are being grilled and lightly charred on a gas grill.
  1. Step 3: Grill the corn with the husks on for 10 minutes.
Six ears of corn that have been shucked and are being grilled on a gas grill with some of the kernels slightly charred.
  1. Step 4: Remove the husks and grill until charred in spots.
A person brushing a cream and cheese mixture over the surface of an ear of corn that has been grilled.
  1. Step 5: Remove the grill and brush the cream mixture all over the hot corn.
A close-up view of a row of Mexican street corn that has been garnished with crumbled Cotija cheese and chopped cilantro.
  1. Step 6: Place on a platter and sprinkle on more Cotija, cilantro, squeezed lime, and cayenne

Expert Tip

You can get a head start on preparing the corn by removing the silk two or three days ahead—while it can be a bit tedious, especially when doubling or tripling the recipe, this early step makes the rest of the preparation quick and easy. If you’re short on time, simply remove the husks before grilling and skip grilling with the husks altogether.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • This amazing side dish is wonderful served family style, nice and hot.
  • We love to leave the stem intact at the base of each ear so folks can use it to hold the corn while they dress their own and eat it.
  • There’s nothing much more festive than placing out a platter piled high with freshly prepared elote.
  • You’ll want to have plenty of extra crumbled Cotija cheese, as well as chopped fresh cilantro, lime wedges, and cayenne pepper, so folks can customize their corn. Fun, festive, and so delicious!

Expert Tip

Prepare the sauce at least an hour before grilling the corn and chill it in the refrigerator. Then, slather on the sauce while the corn is good and hot.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make elote without grilling the corn?

Yes, you can boil or roast the corn as alternatives, but grilling gives elote its signature smoky flavor.

How do I keep elote from getting soggy?

To prevent soggy elote, apply the mayonnaise and cheese just before serving, and avoid covering it for too long.

Can I turn elote into a side salad?

Absolutely! Check out our recipe for esquites! It’s elote without the cobs!

Is elote gluten-free?

Yes, traditional elote is naturally gluten-free, making it a great snack for those with gluten sensitivities.

🔥 More Amazing Corn Side Dishes

  • Slow-cooker corn on the cob cutlets resting in a large white ceramic platter with fresh ears of corn nearby.
    Slow Cooker Corn on the Cob
  • A large white serving bowl filled with black bean and corn salad with two gold serving spoons tucked in beside the salad.
    Zesty Black Bean and Corn Salad
  • A straight-on view of grilled vegetables with Italian dressing all resting on a large bamboo oval platter.
    Grilled Vegetables with Italian Dressing
  • A cast-iron skillet filled with Mexican cream corn topped with crumbled queso fresco, chopped tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.
    Mexican Cream Corn

Ready to make the best corn on the cob on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A row six ears of Mexican street corn, eloté, resting on sheets of brown paper with lime wedges scattered around them.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Elote (Mexican Street Cron)

Elote is iconic street food in Mexico and has become wildly popular around the world. It's ideal for serving at an outdoor BBQ but is great for so many types of occasions. If you don't have a grill, the corn can be boiled.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Mexican
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 191kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas grill, charcoal grill, or electric grill

Ingredients

  • 8 ears fresh corn preferably in husks
  • ½ cup Mexican crema or creme fraiche, or sour cream
  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • ¾ cup Cotija cheese crumbled, see NOTES
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper more for dusting
  • 1 lime juiced, about 2 tbsp
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup cilantro fresh, chopped
  • Lime wedges for garnish

Instructions

  • Prepare your grill for medium-high heat.
  • Pull the husks back from each ear of corn. Use your fingers to remove as much of the silk for each ear of corn. Bring the husks back around the ear of corn, and use string, or a strand of the husk to tie the tops of the husks so they stay on the corn. (It's okay if some of the corn is visible through the husks).
    8 ears fresh corn
  • In a medium bowl, mix the Mexican crema (or creme friache or sour cream), mayonnaise, ½ cup crumbled Cotija, cayenne, lime juice, and salt.
    ½ cup Mexican crema, ¼ cup mayonnaise, ¾ cup Cotija cheese, ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper, 1 lime, 1 teaspoon salt
  • Cook corn in husks on the grill for about 8 to 10 minutes, until the husks have begun to char. Watch them closely, and move them around the grill often with metal tongs. The husks will burn easily, so stay with them!
  • Remove the corn from the grill, and when cool enough to handle, remove the husks from each ear of corn, leaving a portion of the stalk in place. Place the corn back on the grill for about 12 to 15 minutes, until kernels are browned in spots, turning occasionally.
  • Remove corn from the grill and place on a large cutting board.
  • Brush the cream mixture all over the corn while still hot.
  • Place on a platter and sprinkle on the remaining Cotija cheese, the cilantro, freshly squeezed lime, and extra cayenne, if desired. Serve at once.
    ½ cup cilantro, Lime wedges

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
Mexican crema is often found in the dairy area of many well-stocked supermarkets or at Hispanic markets. If you can’t find it, you can substitute sour cream. 
Cotija cheese will usually be near the Mexican crema in the dairy area of your supermarket. If you can’t find it, you could use crumbled mild feta cheese or crumbled parmesan. 
The ears of corn can be prepped up to 2 days in advance. Wrap them in plastic (or foil) to keep them from drying out. 
If you don’t have a grill, you can boil the corn for 5 to 10 minutes, depending on how fresh it is. 

Nutrition

Calories: 191kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 571mg | Potassium: 268mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 396IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in May 2018, but has been updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography, and a fabulous new video in June 2023!

Strawberry Pavlova

June 18, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

An untouched strawberry pavlova topped with macerated strawberries and fresh strawberries sitting on a white cake stand.

This dessert is wonderful any time of the year, but during the warm spring and summer months, it is especially delightful.

If you’re looking for a unique dessert that’s not too heavy, not overly sweet, and a little different, you are going to love this recipe. The baked meringue topped with fresh whipped cream and macerated (sweetened) fresh strawberries is a dessert lover’s dream come true. The meringue can even be made up to 24 hours in advance!

An untouched strawberry pavlova topped with macerated strawberries and fresh strawberries sitting on a white cake stand.

How To Make Strawberry Pavlova

We had a wonderful fan ask us to come up with a recipe for this dessert. We began our due diligence and learned about the colorful history of this incredible dish.

It’s debated whether it originated in Australia or New Zealand, but it is agreed upon that is named for the Russian ballerina named Anna Pavlova.

All we can tell, after much testing, we can attest that it is one of the best desserts we’ve ever prepared and served. It’s amazing!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There are just a handful of ingredients in this wonderful dessert, but they come together to make such a glorious looking and tasting dish.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Egg whites – Room temp. Save the egg yolks to make Caesar salad or mayonnaise
Cornstarch
Sugar – Granulated
Vanilla extract – Madagascar is an excellent choice
Lemon juice – Fresh is best, usually from half of a lemon
Strawberries – Fresh is definitely best, sliced and mixed with sugar (leave a few fresh ones without the sugar for topping the pavlova)

EXPERT TIP: Stop beating the egg whites just when they form stiff peaks. If you over-beat them, it could cause the meringue to collapse a bit during the baking process. Use a small spatula, or the back of a spoon, to gently spread the meringue on the parchment paper within a 9-inch circle.

An overhead view of a person using a spoon to spread out French meringue into a circular mound on parchment paper.

Tips for Making Perfect Strawberry Pavlova

Let the meringue cool completely – After the meringue has baked at 250°F for one hour. Turn the oven off and let the pavlova cool in the oven for 2 hours. At this point, the pavlova can be stored in a cool place, preferably covered, for up to 24 hours before topping.

Arrange fresh strawberries on top – Using a combination of macerated sliced strawberries and fresh whole berries makes for a gorgeous presentation. Spoon a little of the juice from the macerated strawberries so it drizzles the sides in a few places.

Serve the pavlova immediately – Although you can make the baked meringue ahead of time, don’t top it with the cream and strawberries until just before serving. If you do add it to far in advance, it will still be delicious, but the meringue could get soggy.

A person using a large spoon to add a layer of homemade whipped cream on top of a layer of baked meringue.

How To Serve

The pavlova can be sliced similar to how you would slice a pie.

Don’t worry if you don’t get a perfectly shaped pie shape for each portion. It’s intended to be a little “sloppy.”

If desired, you can top it with additional fruit, such as blueberries, blackberries, cranberries, and sliced kiwi.

A close-up view of a silver spoon being used to place macerated strawberries on top of whipped cream that is resting on a layer of baked meringue.

Other Amazing Classic Dessert Recipes To Try

If you’re a fan a sweet ending to a wonderful meal, then these classic recipes are sure to get your really excited:

Peach Cobbler
Lemon Meringue Pie
Banana Pudding Trifle
Red, White, and Blue Trifle
Homemade Chocolate Eclairs
Classic Chocolate Cake
Old-Fashioned Linzer Bars
Key Lime Pie
Coconut and Lemon Curd Cupcakes
Chocolate and Marshmallow Cupcakes
Best-Ever Blondies

These are all amazing in their own right, but take a look at this pavlova. Isn’t it calling your name?

An overhead view of a strawberry pavlova.

This dessert just screams summer yumminess. But, it’s so good, you’ll be tempted to serve it all year long!

Remember, you can prepare the meringue up to one day in advance, but don’t top it until soon before you are going to serve it (no more than an hour ahead of serving time).

When we serve this pavlova, we always get rave reviews and requests for the recipe. We have no doubt you will experience the same thing. It’s become Wesley’s new all-time favorite dessert. Now, that’s saying something!

A slice of strawberry pavlova on a white dessert plate with the pavlova sitting on a cake stand in the background.

Ready to make the best dessert this side of Australia and New Zealand? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A side view of a strawberry pavlova sitting on a white cake stand next to a red-checkered napkin.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Strawberry Pavlova

Strawberry Pavlova is so beautiful to serve and is always such a hit. Be sure to beat the egg whites just until stiff peaks form, this is usually about 8 to 10 minutes. The baked meringue can be made up to 24 hours in advance.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Resting time in oven2 hours hrs
Total Time3 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Australian or New Zealand
Servings: 8
Calories: 141kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Parchment paper
  • Stand mixer with whisk Or hand mixer
  • Baking sheet

Ingredients

  • 4 egg whites room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon corn starch
  • 1 cup sugar plus tablespoon for the whipped cream
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract divided
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice fresh
  • 1½ cups heavy cream

For the Macerated Strawberries

  • 16 oz strawberries sliced, leave some whole, for garnish
  • 2 tablespoon sugar

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 250°F and place a baking rack in the lower third of the oven.
  • Place a sheet of parchment paper on a baking sheet and use a 9-inch cake pan to draw a circle on the paper with a pen. Flip the paper over.
  • In the bowl of a stand mixer, fitted with the whisk attachment, beat the egg whites on medium for about 1 minute. Add in the cornstarch and continue beating for another 3 minutes, until foamy. You may need to use a small spatula to scrape down some of the cornstarch from the sides of the bowl.
    4 egg whites, 1 tablespoon corn starch
  • Raise the speed to as high as it will go and gradually add in the sugar. Continue to beat on high until stiff peaks form, about 8 minutes. Turn the mixer off and add 1 teaspoon vanilla and the lemon juice. Turn the mixer back on high and mix until all is combined.
    1 cup sugar, 2 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • Transfer the meringue from the bowl (and whisk) onto the parchment paper. Use the back of a large spoon or a spatula to spread the meringue into a sphere within the circle you drew on the parchment paper. Use the spoon to create a little indention on the top and create small little "whisps" on the sides.
  • Place the baking sheet in the oven and bake for 1 hour. Turn the oven off and let the meringue rest (in the oven) for 2 hours.
  • About 1 hour before serving, place the sliced strawberries in a medium bowl and sprinkle in 2 tablespoon of sugar. Toss with a wooden spoon and place in the refrigerator.
    16 oz strawberries, 2 tablespoon sugar
  • Gently remove the parchment paper from the baked meringue and place the meringue on a platter.
  • Use your stand mixer with the whisk attachment (cleaned) or a hand mixer to beat together the cream with 2 tablespoon of sugar and 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract. Beat on high until soft peaks form.
    1½ cups heavy cream
  • Use a large spoon to transfer the whipped cream on top of the baked meringue. Top with the macerated strawberries, spooning some of the juice onto the pavlova so it drizzles down the sides. Top with a few whole strawberries, if desired. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You may notice that a portion of the baked meringue has collapsed a bit, after has rested in the oven. This can occur from overbeating the egg whites. Don't worry, though, you'll cover it with the whipped cream, and the taste will still be the same.
The baked meringue can be made up to 24 hours in advance. Cover loosely with plastic wrap and keep in the fridge. Allow it to come to room temperature (about 1 hour) before topping with the cream and strawberries. 
Though the pavlova will be delicious hours after it is served, it is best served right after you add the whipped cream and strawberries. The longer it sits, the more likely the meringue will get slightly soggy. 
The whipped cream can be made 1 to 2 hours in advance (keep in the fridge). 

Nutrition

Calories: 141kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 26mg | Potassium: 114mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Best Fried Fish Sandwich

June 14, 2023 by Kris Longwell 10 Comments

A fried fish sandwich sitting on a black plate next a lemon wedge and potato chips with a glass of beer and another plate of a fish sandwich in the background.

We know it’s a bold statement to say anything is the best. But wait until you make this incredible sandwich.

If you love the classic fish and chips as much as we do, you will flip for this sandwich. It’s simple to prepare, but the combination of flavors is epic, in our humble opinion. The homemade tartar sauce puts it over the top!

A close-up view of a fried fish sandwich that includes homemade tartar sauce, a slice tomatoes, green leaf lettuce, and bread and butter pickles on a toasted hamburger bun.

How To Make the Best Fried Fish Sandwich

This truly has become one of our favorite sandwiches of all time.

And you will love how easy it is to make in the comfort of your own kitchen!

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Your grocery list won’t be extensive when you make these wonderful sandwiches, but be sure to have good top-notch ingredients!

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Fresh cod – Seek out a good fish market and be sure to select the freshest cod possible
Seasoning – Salt and pepper is all you need
Flour – All-purpose
Eggs – Lightly beaten
Breadcrumbs – Panko provides a wonderful crunchy exterior, but regular breadcrumbs work, too
Buns – Brioche is a great choice for this sandwich’s flavor profile
Tomato – Sliced and topped with a little salt and pepper
Lettuce – Green leaf or romaine are great choices
Pickles – Trust us, bread and butter are so good
Tartar sauce – Homemade is easy and puts this sandwich in a class all of its own

EXPERT TIP: Set out three baking tins or pans to create an easy 1-2-3 dredge station. Be sure to gently shake off excess flour, egg, and, breadcrumbs. For an extra crispy sandwich, you can do a double dredge, but we think one dredge is just perfect.

A person dredging a fish fillet through flour, and then an egg bath, and then Panko bread crumbs.

Tips for a Perfect Fried Fish Sandwich

Select the right filet of fish – Choose a firm, white fish like cod, haddock, or halibut that can hold up to frying without falling apart. Cod is definitely best, and is also most not costly.

Season each component – We recommend adding a pinch of salt with the breadcrumbs, but also sprinkling the fish all over with salt, and even a little pinch on the tomato.

Toast the bun – For the classic taste, we go with a nice soft bun, such as Brioche, and then toast it either in hot skillet or on a griddle or grill.

Make the tartar sauce – We can’t stress this enough. The homemade tartar sauce is the perfect match to the other components in this sandwich. It will keep in the fridge for up to 1 week.

A close-up view of a small glass jar filled with homemade tartar sauce with a spoon stuck into it.

How To Serve

This sandwich is definitely best served when the fried filet is fresh out of the oil.

However, we’ve reheated leftover fish filets in a 350°F oven the next day, and the sandwich was still delicious.

Be sure to have plenty of the condiments ready for the sandwich. They really all come together to create the classic taste.

Crosshatch sweet potato chips, pasta salad, or potato salad, all make for classic sides to the sandwich. An ice-cold beer or iced tea are ideal beverages.

A person using a pair of metal tongs to hold up a fried fish fillet in a cast iron skillet filled with hot oil.

Other Amazing Sandwiches to Make at Home

Everyone loves a good sandwich, right? Well, here are some of our favorite sandwich recipes that you would probably love, as well.

Chicken Fried Steak Sandwich
Marinated Steak Sandwich
Grilled Honey Mustard Chicken Sandwich with Bacon
Crispy Fried Chicken Sandwich
Buffalo Chicken Sandwich with Ranch
Epic Sausage and Peppers Hero
Best-Ever Lobster Roll
Classic Tuna Melt
Fried Catfish Po-Boy
Wagyu Pastrami Sandwich
New Orleans-Style Muffuletta
Classic BLT with Garlic Basil Aioli

These are some of the best sandwiches in the world. But, in the meantime, isn’t this incredible sandwich calling your name?

A fried fish sandwich sitting on a black plate next a lemon wedge and potato chips with a glass of beer and another plate of a fish sandwich in the background.

If we had to choose our favorite sandwich on the blog that we have ever prepared, eaten, and served, this very well could be in the #1 spot.

And to make it even better, it comes together in a matter of minutes.

Give yourself a little extra time to make the tartar sauce from scratch. It’s easy to make but gets better as it chills in the refrigerator for at least an hour, or even better, overnight.

Every single bite of the incredible is a true taste sensation!

A straight-on view of a fried fish sandwich with a bite taken out of it sitting on a black dinner plate and a glass of beer in the background.

Ready to make the best sandwich this side of any boardwalk anywhere? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a fried fish sandwich that includes homemade tartar sauce, a slice tomatoes, green leaf lettuce, and bread and butter pickles on a toasted hamburger bun.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Best Fried Fish Sandwich

This Fried Fish Sandwich is one of the tastiest sammies on the planet. And it only takes about 30 minutes to make. Flash fry the fish in some oil, and it doesn't come out greasy at all. We love using Panko bread crumbs for extra crispy and crunchy. The homemade tartar sauce puts it over the top!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time30 minutes mins
Course: Lunch / Dinner, Sandwich
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 717kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

Do Ahead

  • Tartar sauce click for recipe, or use store-bought

Prepare the Sandwiches

  • Vegetable oil for frying
  • 1 lb cod cut into 3" x 3" squares
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • ½ cup water
  • 2 eggs lightly beaten
  • 2 cups Panko breadcrumbs Japanese bread crumbs*
  • 4 brioche buns or hamburger buns
  • Tomato sliced
  • Green lettuce shredded, or torn into pieces
  • Bread and butter pickles drained

Instructions

Prepare the Tartar Sauce

  • Put together the tartar sauce at least 1 hour before preparing the sandwiches and up to 3 to 4 days in advance. (Keep in a jar, covered, in the fridge)
    Tartar sauce

Prepare the Sandwiches

  • Pour enough oil into a sturdy skillet about 1 inch up the side. Heat the oil to 350°F or until a small piece of bread tossed into the oil sizzles, and browns within about 15 seconds.
    Vegetable oil
  • Lightly season the fish fillets with salt and pepper.
    1 lb cod, Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Place the flour in a pan or on a plate, mix the eggs with the water in a pan or medium bowl, and mix together the Panko with 1 teaspoon of salt in a medium bowl.
    1 cup all-purpose flour, ½ cup water, 2 eggs, 2 cups Panko breadcrumbs
  • Dredge each fillet, starting with the flour, shaking off the excess.
  • Submerge the filet into the egg mixture and then shake off the excess.
  • Dredge the filet into the Panko crumbs, helping the crumbs adhere with your fingers.
  • Place the filets on a rack until ready to fry (can be kept in the refrigerator for up to 2 hours).
  • Carefully place the filets in the hot oil, and fry until golden, about 2 to 3 minutes. Do this in batches, if necessary (don't overcrowd the filets in the hot oil).
  • Remove fillets with metal tongs and place them on a paper towel-lined plate.
  • Split the buns and lightly toast them on a hot skillet, griddle, or grill.
    4 brioche buns
  • Spread the tartar sauce on each of the bottom buns, then add the lettuce, a filet, and top with tomato, pickles, and top bun. Sprinkle a little more salt and pepper on the tomato slices, if desired. Serve at once.
    Tomato, Green lettuce, Bread and butter pickles

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Cod can be found in the seafood section of most well-stocked supermarkets. If using frozen, be sure to let it thaw completely before dredging and frying.  You could also substitute haddock, grouper, or catfish. 
To prepare this in the oven, preheat oven to 350°F. Brush 2 tablespoon melted butter in a baking pan and bake the filets for 10 to 12 minutes. Brush 2 more tbsps of melted butter in the pan, flip the filets, and bake for another 10 to 12 minutes, until lightly browned and crispy. 
Leftover fried filets will keep covered in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days. Reheat in a 350°F oven for about 15 to 20 minutes, until heated through and the breading is sizzling a little. 

Nutrition

Calories: 717kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 274mg | Sodium: 698mg | Potassium: 591mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 884IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 5mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in July 2017, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in June 2023.

Bistecca alla Fiorentina (Italian Porterhouse)

June 11, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

An overhead view of bistecca alla fiorentina that has been cut into slices, topped with sautéed herbs and surrounded by roasted balsamic potatoes.

This is, without a doubt, one of those “special occasion” kinds of dishes. Epic hardly begins to describe it.

This dish hails from the glorious Tuscan city of Florence, Italy. It’s huge, which makes it perfect for serving two or three people. We give it a bit of Texas twist and smoke it first and then finish it off with a reverse sear. We love to serve them with our Balsamic Roasted Potatoes with Herbs.

An overhead view of bistecca alla fiorentina that has been cut into slices, topped with sautéed herbs and surrounded by roasted balsamic potatoes.

How To Make Bistecca alla Fiorentina

You may need to make a quick trip to your local butcher to have him/her cut you a nice thick porterhouse steak.

And there are several methods for cooking the steak. The reverse sear ensures a crisp, charred outside and a juicy, tender inside.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients and Tools You Will Need

There are not a ton of ingredients for the Italian-style porterhouse, obviously, it’s all about the meat. However, you do have options on what tools to use for cooking the steak.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Porterhouse steak – This cut has a “T” shaped bone in the middle with a filet on one side and a strip on the other. You’ll want the steak to about 1½-inches thick and weigh between 1½ to 2 lbs.
Seasonings – All you need is salt and pepper, and then coarse finishing salt for garnish
Olive Oil – For searing at the end, and then more for sautéeing the herbs and garlic for garnish
Herbs – Fresh basil and parsley are ideal
Garlic – Minced

Following are the different methods for cooking the steak (before the final “reverse” sear):

Electric smoker – This is how we’re preparing the steak. We smoke the seasoned steak with 2 oz. of hickory wood chips for about 1 hour and 15 minutes (for medium-rare).
Pellet smoker – Set your smoker to 225 and cook the steak until you reach an internal temperature of 125°F (for medium-rare). The temperature will rise about 10 more degrees in the final sear.
Electric or gas grill – Set your grill for a 2-zone heat (one side with direct heat and the other side with no heat).
Sous Vide – This is an amazing way to cook the steak. Follow manufacturer instructions to reach desired doneness.
Conventional oven – This is our least favorite way to cook the steak (you run the risk of drying it out), but you can cook it on a rack at 350°F until internal temperature reaches 125°F, usually about 30 to 40 minutes (ovens vary).

EXPERT TIP: If using a smoker, be sure not to overdo it with the wood chips. The beef will absorb quite a bit of smoke. We find that 2 ounces (a small handful) is just the right amount. A pan of water under the rack with the steak creates steam and helps to keep the meat extra tender.

An uncooked porterhouse steak that has been seasoned with salt and pepper sitting on a grate inside an electric smoker.

Tips for Perfect Bistecca alla Fiorentina

Sure, here are four tips for making perfect Bistecca alla Fiorentina:

Choose the right cut of meat: You need to choose a porterhouse steak that is at least 1-½ inches thick and weighs around 2-3 pounds. It’s important to choose a steak that is well-marbled and has a good amount of fat content to ensure that it stays juicy and tender when cooked. A t-bone steak is a perfectly fine substitution.

Bring the steak to room temperature: Before cooking the steak, it’s important to let it sit at room temperature for at least an hour. This will allow the steak to cook more evenly and prevent it from becoming tough or overcooked.

Season generously: This Tuscan steak is traditionally seasoned with just salt and pepper, but it’s important to season the steak generously on both sides. Use coarse sea salt and freshly ground black pepper to enhance the natural flavor of the meat.

EXPERT TIP: The authentic preparation of this steak is typically grilled for a few minutes per side over a very hot coal fire and served quite rare. We’ve modified this somewhat to allow the steak to be cooked first to nearly reach the desired temperature and then sear it off a the end. This is why it’s called “reverse” sear, since the searing doesn’t happen at the start.

A close-up view of a porterhouse steak that is being seared in a hot cast-iron skillet.

How To Serve

This dish is so impressive and always garners lots of “ooh’s” and “ah’s” when it’s brought to the table.

We love to serve it with our roasted balsamic potatoes with herbs. To make it a feast like none other, you could also serve it with grilled Italian sausage and sautéed red peppers and onions.

You can serve it family-style on a huge platter or cutting board and let folks serve themselves.

For a dramatic touch, don’t drizzle on the sautéed herbs with garlic until after you’ve brought the dish to the table, and then sprinkle with the finishing sauce. Your guests will be salivating!

A person using a small silver spoon to drizzle sautéed herbs and garlic over slices of a medium-rare porterhouse steak.

Other Amazing Steak and Beef Recipes to Try

If you like steak and beef as much as we do, then you will love each and every one of these recipes:

Sous vide Skirt Steak with Chimichurri Sauce
Italian Pot Roast
Grilled Ribeye with Chimichurri Sauce
Ribeye with Gorgonzola and Caramelized Onion Sauce
Seared Ribeye with Blistered Tomatoes and Bordelaise Sauce
Beef Tenderloin with Red Wine Sauce
Steak au Poivre
Carne Asada
Steak Pizzaiola
Grilled Tri-Tip with Santa Maria Salsa

These are all show-stopper beef dishes. But, folks, you want to talk about the ultimate show-stopper? You need to make this:

A close up view of sliced bistecca alla Fiorentina with sautéed herbs and minced garlic drizzled over the top.

This dish is a true celebration for anyone who loves a good steak.

Think about it, you’re getting a tender beef filet (filet mignon) AND a tender, juicy strip steak (aka: New York Strip) in one dish!

And in the unlikely event that you have any of the steak leftovers, you won’t believe how incredible it makes a sandwich: Toasted bun, a little mayo, and melted provolone over the heated steak. Incredible.

A large chef's knife holding up two slices of a bistecca alla Fiorentina with some sautéed herbs on each slice.

Ready to make the best steak dinner this side of Florence, Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of bistecca alla fiorentina that has been cut into slices, topped with sautéed herbs and surrounded by roasted balsamic potatoes.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Bistecca alla Fiorentina (Italian-Style Porterhouse)

This epic Italian beef dish is truly one that is made to impress. We smoke our version in our electric smoker, but see the NOTES on other methods for cooking the steak. This easily serves two people. Grill up some Italian sausages for a feast to feed a small gathering.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Resting time10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 55 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 2
Calories: 568kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Smoker Electric or pellet, see NOTES for other options

Ingredients

  • 1 2 lb porterhouse steak about 1½" thick
  • Salt and pepper
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus 2 tablespoon for searing
  • 3 tablespoon basil fresh, chopped
  • 3 tablespoon parsley flat-leaf, fresh, chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • coarse finishing salt

Instructions

  • Set your porterhouse out for about 30 minutes to lose some of its chill.
    1 2 lb porterhouse steak
  • Liberally season the steak on both sides with salt and pepper.
    Salt and pepper
  • Add 2 ounces of hickory wood chips to your smoker box and place it in the smoker. Place the steak on one of the smoker grates, close the door, and turn the heat to 225°F. Smoke until you reach an internal temperature of 120 to 125°F for medium rare, usually about 1 hour and 15 minutes. Remove the steak from the smoker.
  • Heat 2 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (preferably cast iron) over medium-high heat. Once the oil is very hot and shimmering, place the steak into the skillet and let the underside brown for about 1 to 2 minutes. Carefully flip the steak and brown the other side for another minute or two. Use a large spatula to place the steak on a cutting board and let rest for 10 minutes while you make the sautéed herbs and garlic sauce.
    ¼ cup olive oil
  • In a small skillet (or use the same one that you seared the meat in), heat ¼ cup of olive oil over medium heat. Add the garlic, basil, and parsley, and sauté, stirring often, for about 60 seconds. Transfer to a bowl. Set aside.
    3 tablespoon basil, 3 tablespoon parsley, 4 cloves garlic
  • If desired, use a sharp paring knife to cut the filet and the strip away from the bone. Slice the steaks into ½-inch to 1-inch thick slices. Arrange the sliced meat back into place around the T-bone.
  • Use a spoon to add a strip of the sautéed herbs and garlic down the center of each steak. Sprinkle with coarse sea salt and serve at once.
    coarse finishing salt

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Alternate methods for cooking the steak:
On your gas, charcoal, or electric grill. Set up a 2-zone heat source (direct heat on one side of the grill and no heat on the other side). Cook the steak on the no-heat side until the inside reaches 120 to 125°F for medium rare. If desired, you can then do the final sear on the direct heat side of the grill. 
Sous Vide: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for cooking the porterhouse with your sous vide machine. You'll need a vessel and baggie large enough to hold the large steak. Do the final sear as is in the recipe. 
Oven (not recommended): Preheat oven to 350°F. Place steak on a baking sheet and bake until internal temp reaches 125°F, usually about 30 to 40 minutes. Sear as directed in the recipe. 
If you can't get a porterhouse, a regular T-bone will work just fine. 
For medium, take the steak out when the internal temperature reaches 135°F. For medium-well, remove the steak when it reaches 145°F.  
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days (they make amazing sandwiches!). 

Nutrition

Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 0.3mg | Sodium: 660mg | Potassium: 68mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 664IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada

June 7, 2023 by Kris Longwell 8 Comments

Two black bean and roasted chicken tostadas topped with corn salsa, shredded lettuce, and Mexican crema sitting on a scratched baking sheet.

We can say with confidence that this is one of the most delicious Mexican-style dishes we’ve ever created, served, or eaten.

The flavors blend together beautifully. From the crispy, crunchy tortillas, to the creamy and savory beans, flavorful roasted chicken, tangy dressed romaine, and awesome roasted corn salsa. It is truly a special dish. And so much of it can be made in advance!

A close-up view of a black bean and roasted chicken tostada that is topped with corn salsa, lettuce, and Mexican crema sitting on a scratchy black baking pan

How to Make Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada

There are shortcuts you can make with this recipe and still get wonderful results.

And, much of the components of the tostada can be made ahead of time.

 

NOTE: If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, you can take some shortcuts on the following list of ingredients, but we find the best results are when you roast your own chicken and fry up tortillas.

Here’s What You’ll Need on Hand

Tortillas – Corn is the way to go. Grab some soft corn tortillas from the store and fry them up. They are amazing, although, you could go with store-bought tostadas, and be just fine. Warm them first in the oven.
Vegetable oil – For frying the tortillas
Pork lard – Or bacon grease, or olive oil
Onion – Chopped
Garlic – Minced
Black beans – Canned is perfectly fine, save the liquid, though!
Salt – Kosher
Chicken – Roasted bone-in, skin-on chicken breasts with a little olive, salt, and pepper, is so delicious. Although, shredded chicken from a rotisserie works well, too. We don’t recommend canned chicken.
Mexican crema – Sour cream thinned with a small bit of cream is a great substitute
Roasted corn salsa – This can be made up to several days in advance (click the link for the recipe). 
Cotija cheese – Can be found in the Hispanic section of many supermarkets or at Latino food markets. Good substitutes are queso fresco or feta.
Green leaf lettuce – Or romaine, or even iceberg.
Oil – Extra-virgin.
Vinegar – Apple cider or red wine are great choices.

EXPERT TIP: The tortillas can be fried several hours in advance. Cover them loosely with paper towels. Don’t put them in a container because they will lose their crispiness.

A close-up view of a stack of freshly fried corn tortillas for tostadas

Tips for Making the Perfect Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada

Use High-Quality Ingredients: The success of this dish depends on the quality of the ingredients used. Use fresh corn salsa, high-quality chicken, and crisp lettuce for the best results.

Make the Roasted Corn Salsa from Scratch: Making the roasted corn salsa from scratch will give your tostadas a fresh and flavorful taste. Roast the corn in a skillet and mix it with sautéed onions, jalapenos, and lime juice for a tangy and slightly spicy flavor.

Fry the Tortillas Until Crispy: To make the tostadas, fry the tortillas in hot oil until they are crispy and golden brown. This will give them a crunchy texture that contrasts with the soft and flavorful toppings.

EXPERT TIP: You want the beans to be slightly mashed, but not necessarily the texture of refried beans. Keep the drained liquid from the canned beans handy. Thin the beans so they are easily spreadable, but not runny.

A close-up view of black beans that have been sautéd with onion in pork lard and then lightly mashed in a saucepan

Other Amazing Mexican Recipes to Try

Authentic Mexican is not exactly like Tex-Mex, which is loaded with cheese, spices, and often lots of sauce. These South-of-the-Border dishes are some of our favorites and we think you will like them, too

Veracruz-Style Shrimp with Tortillas and Pepian (Pumpkin) Sauce
Chipotle Roasted Chicken
Classic Chicken Molé
Pork and Hominy Pozole (Pork Stew)
Tortilla Soup with Roasted Chicken
Classic Chili Rellenos with Cheese
Seafood-Stuffed Poblanos
Huevos Rancheros
Chiles Chilaquiles
Authentic Mexican Rice
Elotes (Mexican Grilled Corn)

EXPERT TIP: The corn salsa can be prepared several days in advance. Be sure to let the salsa come to room temperature before serving with the tostadas. If preferred, you can gently warm it over medium heat until heated through. If necessary, add a little chicken broth, or water, to thin the salsa, if too thick.

A bowl filled with roasted corn salsa

There is so much to love about these amazing tostadas.

They are wonderful for entertaining. Set all of the ingredients out in festive bowls and containers, and let guests build their own tostada!

The combination of flavors just works beautifully. Every time we serve them, we get rave reviews from family and friends. You can’t go wrong with these incredible Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostadas!

Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada recipe

Ready to make the best tostadas this side of Mexico City? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

Two black bean and roasted chicken tostadas topped with corn salsa, shredded lettuce, and Mexican crema sitting on a scratched baking sheet.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada

This Black Bean and Roasted Chicken Tostada recipe is a true winner. It's not spicy, but deep in flavor and the combination of crunchy freshly made tortillas matched against the black beans and tender chicken, just can't be beat. So good!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Chicken Roasting1 hour hr
Total Time2 hours hrs
Course: Appetizer or Entree
Cuisine: Mexican, Tex-Mex
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 199kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Deep-fryer or skillet with oil

Ingredients

  • 2 chicken breasts skin on, bone-in
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • salt and pepper
  • 2 cups skillet roasted corn salsa
  • Vegetable oil enough for a depth of ¾ inch for frying, plus or in a deep-fryer
  • 8 corn tortillas preferably yellow
  • 1 tablespoon pork lard or bacon grease, or olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 15 oz. can black beans liquid drained - reserve the liquid (don't throw it out, you'll need it).
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt See NOTES
  • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • 2 cups romaine lettuce sliced
  • ¾ cup crema or sour cream thinned with a little milk or cream
  • 1 cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

Do Ahead - Corn Salsa and Roasted Chicken

  • To roast the chicken, preheat your oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with foil and place a baking rack on it. Place the chicken breasts on the rack and liberally brush them all over with olive oil, and then sprinkle all over with salt and pepper. Bake for 55 to 65 minutes, or until internal temperature is 165°F. When cool enough to handle, remove the skins, and shred the meat with two forks or your fingers. Set aside or refrigerate (let come to room temperature, or heat in the microwave when ready to serve).
    1 tablespoon olive oil, salt and pepper, 2 chicken breasts
  • Make the corn salsa up to several days in advance. Allow to come to room temperature before serving. (Link to the recipe is in the Ingredients list).
    2 cups skillet roasted corn salsa

Make the Tostada Shells

  • In a sturdy skillet heat the vegetable oil over medium-high heat, or heat your deep-fryer to 350°F.
    Vegetable oil, 8 corn tortillas
  • When the oil is hot enough to make the edge of a tortilla sizzle excitedly, fry the tortillas one at a time by laying a tortilla in the oil, and after about 10 seconds, use tongs to flip it over. Continue to push down in the oil every few seconds. When the bubbling starts to stop and the tortilla has darkened a bit (usually about a minute of frying time), remove it from the oil and drain it on paper towels. Immediately sprinkle a pinch of salt on the hot tortilla.
  • When fried just long enough, they will be completely crisp when cooled. You may need to test a couple at first, and adjust the heat until they cook just right.

Prepare the Beans

  • Heat the pork lard (or bacon grease or vegetable oil) over medium heat in a medium-sized saucepan.
    1 tablespoon pork lard
  • Add the onions and sauté, stirring often, until they are soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and sauté until aromatic, about another 30 seconds.
    1 medium onion, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the drained beans. Using a potato masher, or the back of a large wooden spoon, coarsely mash the beans, mixing in the onion and garlic as you go.
    2 15 oz. can black beans
  • Add enough of the reserved liquid to give the beans a spreadable consistency, not too thick, but also not too thin.
  • Taste and season with salt, typically about ½ teaspoon. Cover and set aside.
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Prepare the Topping

  • When you are ready to serve, set out the shredded chicken, the crema (or thinned sour cream), corn salsa and cheese.
  • Gently re-heat the beans if necessary.
  • Meanwhile, in a large bowl, mix together the vinegar and olive oil. Toss in the lettuce and season with ¼ teaspoon salt.
    2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil, 2 cups romaine lettuce

Building the Tostadas

  • One by one, layer the tostadas by spreading each fried tortilla with about 2 heaping tablespoons of beans (if too thick, thin with a little water).
  • Spread on two tablespoons of the chicken, then ¼ cup of the dressed lettuce, and then about ¼ to ½ cup of the corn salsa.
  • Drizzle on a little of the crema (or sour cream) and sprinkle generously with the crumbled cheese.
    ¾ cup crema, 1 cup cotija cheese
  • Arrange tostadas on a platter and serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Shredded rotisserie chicken is a decent substitution for roasted chicken.  Both the chicken and the salsa can be made several days in advance. Be sure to bring them to room temperature (or warm gently in the microwave) before serving. 
The tortillas can be fried several hours before serving. Don't place them in a container as they may get soft.  Store-bought tostada shells are perfectly fine, too. If using store-bought, you'll want to heat them in la ow-temp oven (225°F) for about 10 minutes before serving. 
These tostadas are best served fresh. Leftovers will keep for a day or two, but the shells will become a bit soft. 

Nutrition

Calories: 199kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 135mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1221IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 160mg | Iron: 1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in March 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in June 2023!

Homemade Detroit-Style Pizza

June 4, 2023 by Kris Longwell 4 Comments

An overhead view of a whole Detroit-style pizza in a rectangular steel pan with two parallel stripes of red sauce on top of the pizza.

If you are a fan of pizza (and who isn’t), you need to prepare yourself for this one.

Detroit is a U.S. city known for automobiles, Motown, wonderful people, and now: Pizza! This style of pizza has been popular in Detroit for decades, but somehow, it stayed somewhat of a secret. That is until recent years. Once you taste it, you’ll wonder why it’s not the most famous pizza in the world. It’s really that good.

An overhead view of a whole Detroit-style pizza in a rectangular steel pan with two parallel stripes of red sauce on top of the pizza.

How To Make Homemade Detroit-Style Pizza

Similar to the strict guidelines for making authentic Neapolitan pizza, there are some pretty solid rules to follow when attempting to make authentic Detroit-style pizza.

We studied the masters for making this kind of pizza, including the award-winning Peter Reinhart, and put together a recipe that produces one of the best (if not the best) pizzas we’ve ever made, served, or consumed.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video!

The Ingredients and Tools You Will Need

It’s important to remember the most important parts of this pizza are the cheese and the dough. Everything else is important, but you need to get these two components right. To make it truly authentic, you may need to order a few items online.

Here’s What To Have on Hand</h4)

For the Dough:
Flour – This is important. You need to use unbleached bread flour, not all-purpose or even Italian ‘OO’
Salt – Kosher
Yeast – We use Instant, or Rapid-Rise
Water – It needs to be cool, 75 to 80°F
Olive oil – You’ll need to have plenty on hand, you’ll see why

The Pizza Ingredients:
Cheese – Brick is traditional, but a combination of Monterey Jack and Mozzarella will work, too. Cut them into small ¼-inch cubes
Pepperoni – We love to get Boar’s head natural-casing pepperoni and slice it into ¼-inch rounds.

For the Sauce:
Oil – Olive oil, or butter
Garlic – Minced
Tomatoes – Crushed, be sure to go with a top-notch variety
Seasonings – Dried oregano, basil, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes
Vinegar – Red wine

The Tools:
Pan – Traditional is a steel (blue steel) pre-seasoned 10×14″ pan. We got ours from DetroitStylePizza.com. You can also use a 9×9″inch metal baking dish, or even a 9-inch round metal cake pan.
Bench scraper – This is very helpful in helping you work the dough without over-handling it. It’s also helpful in getting the pizza out of the pan after it bakes. A metal spatula will help, too.
Stand mixer – This makes it easy to bring the dough together, but a bowl with a wooden spoon and your oiled hand will work just fine, too.

EXPERT TIP: The dough will be very sticky. It’s important to keep your hands oiled. As you dimple, stretch, and fold, the dough will relax and the gluten will get to work.

An overhead view of a pair of hands dimpling pizza dough in a rectangular pan that has been oiled and then another view of the same dough that has been stretched to the corners of the pan.

Tips for Making Authentic Detroit-Style Pizza

Use a Deep Dish Pan: This pizza is known for its thick, crispy crust and deep dish pan. Use a square or rectangular pan that is at least 2 inches deep to achieve the signature crust. Take note in the recipe (and in the Notes) of how much dough and cheese you’ll need to use for each sized pan. 

Let the Dough Rise Properly: The dough is a crucial component of this pizza. Let the dough proof in the refrigerator for 12 to 72 hours first, and then let it proof in the pan for at least 2 hours before baking to achieve a light and airy texture. And only use bread flour.

Use the Right Cheese: It is traditionally made with Wisconsin brick cheese, which has a mild flavor and melts easily. You can also use a combination of mozzarella and cheddar cheese for a similar flavor.

Add Toppings Carefully: Add half of the dough before it proofs. Then add the rest of the cheese and toppings. Make sure you’ve got cheese along the edges of the dough and pan because this will create the classic caramelization.

An overhead view of a person holding small cubes of brick cheese with one hand and placing those cubes into pizza dough in a Detroit-style pizza pan.

How To Remove the Pizza From the Pan

Before you bake the pizza, be sure you have liberally oiled the bottom of the pan and the sides. The dough will seem oil, but it will bake into the dough as it cooks and prevent the dough from sticking to the pan.

Once you remove the pizza from the oven, use a kitchen towel to hold the pan in place and carefully run a sharp knife around all four edges of the pan.

Next, use your bench scraper, or a large thin metal spatula, to fully separate the pan from the sides of the pan.

Carefully work two large metal spatulas under the pizza to free it from the bottom. This may take a little maneuvering. Now, use both spatulas to carefully lift the pizza from the pan. Don’t worry, the crust is solid and should not break apart.

An close-up view of the end corner of a pan pizza with caramelized edges and crispy pepperoni on top.

How To Serve

A 10×14-inch pizza is typically cut into 6 pieces. This is traditionally referred to as a “4-corner” pizza.

When serving to a crowd, you could easily cut it into 12 pieces.

A pizza cutter works just fine, but find using a large sharp knife works best for cutting cleanly through the crust.

The pizza is definitely best served piping hot right out of the oven.

An overhead view of a deep-dish pepperoni pizza that has been cut into six squares.

This pizza is so good mainly because of the crust.

It’s basically bread that has been lightly fried in the pan.

Adding half of the cheese into the dough before it rises ensure you’ll get the most buttery, insanely delicious crust in the world. Truly spectacular.

A slice of Detroit-style pizza being raised above the pizza with a metal spatula.

Other Homemade Pizza Recipes to Try

It is unlikely that we ever met a pizza that we didn’t like. Here are some of our favorite pizza recipes that you will most likely love, too.

Chicago-Style Deep Dish Pizza
Thin-Crust Pizza with Soppressata, Mushrooms, and Black Olives,
BLT Pizza with Pesto Sauce
Deep Dish Pizza with Sausage and Spinach
Grilled Pulled Pork Pizza with BBQ Sauce
BBQ Chicken Pizza
Grilled Portabella BLT “Pizzas”

These are all extremely delicious pizzas, but, folks, isn’t this Detroit-style pizza calling your name right now?

A straight-on view of a person grating a block of Romano cheese over a slice of Detroit-style pizza with pepperoni on top.

Folks, if you’re like us, you’ve eaten a lot of pizza throughout your life.

Like so many things in life, some pizzas are better than others.

This pizza right here, is in the running to be the absolute best pizza of them all. Wait until you try it.

Every time we serve this, our guests can’t stop raving about it. It goes in minutes.

A square piece of Detroit-style pizza with a bite taken out of it and sitting next to a tall glass of beer.

Ready to make the best pizza this side of, well, Detroit? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a Red Stripe Detroit-Style Pizza that has been cut into four squares.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Detroit-Style Pizza

This may be the best pizza you will ever make or eat. To get the very best results, take the time to let the dough sit at least twelve (or up to 72) hours covered in the fridge. This recipe makes enough for two 10x14" pans. You can easily freeze the dough you don't use, or use the extra in a 9x9" metal pan.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time17 minutes mins
Resting and Proofing1 day d
Total Time1 day d 47 minutes mins
Course: Entree / Pizza
Cuisine: American / Italian
Servings: 8
Calories: 174kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Stand mixer Or bowl with a wooden spoon
  • 2 9x14 steel pans See NOTES
  • Bench scraper Or spatula
  • 2 metal spatulas

Ingredients

For the Dough

  • 4½ cups unbleached bread flour
  • 1¾ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1¼ teaspoon Instant yeast
  • 2 cups water cool, 75 to 85°F
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil plus more for stretching

For the Sauce

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 teaspoon oregano dried
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 1 28 oz can crushed tomatoes
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 tablespoon sugar
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Finishing the Pizza

  • 12 oz brick cheese cut into ¼-inch cubes, See NOTES
  • 1 cup pepperoni sliced
  • ½ cup Romano cheese grated, optional

Instructions

Make the Dough (In Advance)

  • In the bowl of a stand mixer (or in a large bowl), use the paddle attachment to combine the flour, salt, and yeast.
    4½ cups unbleached bread flour, 1¾ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1¼ teaspoon Instant yeast
  • Pour in the water and turn your mixer on low for 30 seconds (or use a wooden spoon to incorporate the water into the flour mixture in a bowl). The dough will be very wet and shaggy (not forming a ball).
    2 cups water
  • Add 2 tablespoon of olive oil and turn the mixer on medium-low for another 30 seconds (or mix thoroughly with a wooden spoon). Let the dough rest for 5 minutes. Increase the mixer speed to medium and mix for another 45 seconds. The dough will still be very sticky.
    2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Spread about 1 to 2 tablespoon of olive oil on a smooth surface. Oil your fingers and a bench scraper (or metal spatula) and remove the dough from the bowl and place on the oiled surface. Use your fingers to flatten the dough into a rough rectangle. Cover the dough with a kitchen towel and let is rest for 5 minutes.
  • Use an oiled bench scraper and your oiled fingers to bring the right side of the dough over to the center of the dough. Do the same with the left side, and then bring the lower half up, and then the upper half. Flatten again to another rectangle. Cover with a kitchen towel and let rest for another 5 minutes. Repeat this process 3 more times. (See Video for reference).
  • Pick the dough up and form it into a ball. Place in an oiled bowl and cover with plastic wrap. Place in the refrigerator for 12 to 72 hours.
  • 4 hours before baking, you'll need to remove the dough from the refrigerator.
  • Add 2 tablespoon of oil to your pan(s) and use your fingers to rub it all over the bottom of the pan and the sides, too.
  • If using two 10x14" pans, you'll need to split the dough in half. If using just one 10x14" pan, you'll need 1 lb of dough. If using a 9x9" pan, you'll need 12" of dough. Any leftover dough can be kept covered in the fridge for another 24 hours, or can be frozen for up to 2 months.
  • Place the dough in the oiled pan and use your fingers to dimple the dough. Working from the center, begin to gently stretch the dough toward the sides of the pan. It won't reach the sides, but that's normal. Cover the pan with a kitchen towel, and let rest for 20 minutes. Repeat the process 2 or 3 more times. With each stretching, the dough will get closer to the sides of the pan, until it finally does extend to the edges.
  • Gently place half of the cubed cheese in the dough. Cover with plastic wrap and allow the dough to proof in a warm, non-drafty area for 2 to 3 hours until it has risen about ⅓ of the way up the sides of the pan. Now it's time to make the sauce.
    12 oz brick cheese

Make the Sauce

  • Heat the oil in a medium-sized saucepan over medium heat. Stir in the garlic, oregano, and red pepper flakes. Stirring often, sauté for about 30 seconds. Add the tomatoes, onion powder, garlic powder, sugar, and salt. Simmer for 30 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat and let completely cool.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 3 cloves garlic, 2 teaspoon oregano, ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes, 1 28 oz can crushed tomatoes, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 tablespoon sugar, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Finish the Pizza

  • Add a pizza stone to your oven and preheat your oven to 500°F. Do this about 30 minutes before baking.
  • Place half of the pepperoni on the top of the dough. Add the rest of the cheese, making sure to place the cubes of cheese along the edge where the dough meets the sides of the pan. (this causes the classic dark caramelization).
    1 cup pepperoni
  • Use a spoon or small ladle to add two or three "stripes" of sauce down the top of the pizza, lengthwise.
  • Place the pan on the pizza stone and bake for 8 minutes. Turn the pan, and bake for another 8 to 9 minutes, until bubbly and lightly browned on top. If desired, in the last two minutes, you can place the pan directly on the bottom of the oven, but be careful, don't let it burn!
  • Remove the pizza from the oven. Use a sharp knife to pry the edges of the pizza away from the sides. Then, use a bench scraper or metal spatula to completely free the pizza along the sides. Carefully use one or two spatulas to work under the pizza to free it from the bottom of the pan. Use two spatulas to lift the pizza from the pan. Place on a large cutting board.
  • Use a large knife, or pizza cutter, to cut the pizza into 6 squares (if using a 10x14" pan). Serve at once with grated Romano on the side, if desired.
    ½ cup Romano cheese

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Brick cheese is perfect for this pizza (see link in the ingredients), but you can substitute half Monterey Jack and mozzarella. Muenster cheese is another excellent option. 
We love using a stick of natural-casing pepperoni from Boar's head. (See link in ingredients). But any type of sliced pepperoni will work. 
Be sure your pan is liberally oiled before adding the dough.
If using one 10x14" pan, you'll need 1 lb of dough and 12 ounces of cheese. If using a 9x9" pan, you'll need 12 ounces and 7.5 ounces of cheese. The leftover dough will keep in the fridge for another 24 hours and can be frozen for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 958mg | Potassium: 82mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 53IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg

NOTE: Much of this recipe is adapted from Peter Reinhart’s Perfect Pan Pizza book.

Egg McMuffin Recipe (Copycat)

June 1, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

A person holding an egg mcmuffin copycat that has been wrapped in white wax paper.

You can’t get much more iconic than this classic fast-food breakfast sandwich.

Most of us love this beloved breakfast item from the perennial fast-food favorite, McDonald’s. You may think it’s impossible to improve upon it, and why would you? Let’s start with homemade English muffins. Throw in thick-cut Canadian bacon, perfectly cooked eggs, and melty American cheese. Through-the-roof delicious!

A person holding an egg mcmuffin copycat that has been wrapped in white wax paper.

How To Make Egg McMuffin Recipe (Copycat)

This amazing breakfast sandwich is actually so much easier to make in your very own kitchen than you might think.

What’s put our version over the top? Homemade English muffins and extra-thick slices of wonderfully smoked Canadian bacon.

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

None of the ingredients for our copycat version are exotic at all, but you will need to plan in advance when ordering the incredible smoked Canadian bacon.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

English muffins – We’ve said it before, and we’ll say it again. Making these from scratch sets this sandwich apart. They can even be made 1 to 2 days in advance!
Canadian bacon – Store-bought is just fine, but it’s so thinly sliced. Order from Amana’s Meat Shop, and then you can slice it as thick as you like!
Eggs – Whole eggs cooked in your English muffin rings or a Mason jar lid to replicate the original McMuffin eggs!
Seasonings – All you need is a little salt and pepper
Cheese – Two layers of American cheese per sandwich is perfection!

EXPERT TIP: As mentioned, use muffin rings, or even the top of Mason jar lid to hold the eggs while you cook and steam them. Melt butter in large skillet, then crack the eggs into the rings. Use a fork to break open the yolks. Add a little water to the pan, and then set another heavy flat object (such as a cast-iron skillet) to keep the egg whites from leaking.

A person using a fork to bread an egg yolk open in a metal round disc that is cooking the whole egg in a skillet.

Tips for Perfect Egg McMuffin Recipe

Toast the English muffins: The classic Egg McMuffin is made with English muffins, which have a soft texture and a slightly crispy exterior. Toast the muffins lightly before assembling the sandwich to give them a crispy texture.

Cook the eggs perfectly: The key to a great Egg McMuffin is a perfectly cooked egg. You can use a round egg ring or a cookie cutter to shape the eggs into a round shape. Cook them over medium heat for about 8 minutes on medium-low heat. Don’t have the heat too high, or you’ll burn the underside. No need to flip the eggs.

Add the right kind of cheese: The classic Egg McMuffin is made with American cheese, which has a mild and creamy flavor. Add a slice of cheese (or better yet, two slices) on top of the egg while it’s still hot to allow it to melt.

Pick up quality Canadian bacon: We get ours from Amana Meat Shop and we slice our own. But, check your local deli, they can probably slice smoked Canadian bacon for you.

A person slicing discs of Canadian bacon from a large tube of the smoked meat on a cutting board with a chef's knife.

How To Serve

Besides being absolutely delicious, these homemade breakfast sandwiches are just so much fun to serve.

Make the English muffins in advance, and then bring it all together just before serving.

We love to wrap individual sandwiches in white wax paper, although, standard parchment paper works, too.

Serve them alongside Restaurant-Quality Hash Browns or Breakfast Potatoes for the perfect breakfast or brunch!

A straight-on view of a homemade egg mcmuffin sitting on a piece of white wax paper.

Other Classic “Copycat” Recipes to Try

Recreating your favorite restaurant and fast-food dishes is not only fun, but a chance for you to kind of ‘show off’ in the kitchen! These recipes take these well-known dishes and make the better, way better!

McDonald’s Big Mac
Taco Bell’s Cheesy Gordita Crunch
Dairy Queen’s DQ Dude (Chicken Fried Steak Sandwich)
TGI Friday’s Potato Skins
Panda Express’ Orange Chicken
Chipotle’s Chicken Burrito Bowl
Olive Garden’s Chicken Marsala

These are classic and unbelievably good. But, at the moment, isn’t this classic breakfast calling your name?

An overhead view of an Egg McMuffin copycat sandwich that is sitting on a wax pepper with the top toasted English muffin resting off to the side.

We’re not here to bad-mouth the classic Micky D breakfast sandwich. In fact, we’re craving them right now!

But, when you can go that extra distance and make it in the comfort of your own kitchen. You and your family will not believe how amazingly delicious it is!

It’s just as good as the original, even better!

A McDonald's Egg McMuffin sitting on a wooden cutting board next to a homemade Egg McMuffin on the other side.

Ready to make the best breakfast sandwich this of…well, McDonald’s? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person holding an egg mcmuffin copycat that has been wrapped in white wax paper.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Egg McMuffin Recipe (Copycat)

Making this classic sandwich at home is actually easier than you might think. Get everything you need to make the English muffins, and the rest comes together in a snap. The English muffin rings can also be used to cook the eggs!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Make the English Muffins2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time3 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast / Brunch
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 392kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • English muffin rings
  • 1 Large skillet such as a cast-iron
  • 1 medium skillet cast-iron works well, this will weigh down the egg holders

Ingredients

  • 8 English muffins
  • 3 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 8 ¼-inch sliced Canadian bacon
  • 8 whole eggs
  • salt and pepper
  • 16 slices American cheese

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare the English muffins (click the link in Ingredients for the recipe)
    8 English muffins

Make the Egg McMuffins

  • Heat one tablespoon of butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Working in batches, add the Canadian bacon and cook, flipping occasionally, until lightly browned on both sides. Set aside.
    3 tablespoon unsalted butter, 8 ¼-inch sliced Canadian bacon
  • In the same large skillet, add the rest of the butter and melt over medium-low heat. Place the rings in the skillet. Pour in about ½ cup of water around the rings. Crack one egg into each ring. Use a fork to break open the yolks. Add a pinch of salt and pepper over each egg. Cover with a large flat object, such as a medium-sized cast-iron skillet. Cook until yolks are fully set, about 8 minutes. Remove from the pan and gently press the cooked eggs from the rings.
    8 whole eggs, salt and pepper
  • Use a fork and then your fingers to split open each English muffin.
  • Toast the muffins, cut-side up, until just toasted. Remove and add two slices of cheese to each bottom muffin. If desired, return to the toaster oven (or low-temperature oven) and heat a minute or two longer until the cheese is melty.
    16 slices American cheese
  • Remove the muffins and place the cooked egg on top of the cheese, and then the seared Canadian bacon. Top with the top muffin and serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
While store-bought English muffins are perfectly fine, making them from scratch is fun, and delicious, and can be done 1 to 3 days in advance. Store in an air-tight container or large zipper baggie. 
If you don't want to order the Canadian bacon, check with your local deli counter. They often have bulk Canadian bacon. Ask for ¼-inch slices (or thicker, if you prefer!). 

Nutrition

Calories: 392kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 217mg | Sodium: 1038mg | Potassium: 196mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 766IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 495mg | Iron: 2mg

Gourmet Beef Sliders

May 28, 2023 by Kris Longwell 6 Comments

A pyramid stack of gourmet beef sliders on a wooden cutting board.

If you love a good hamburger, then you are going to flip for these sliders.

These may be cute little sliders, but when you take that first bite, you will not believe the combination of flavors. The rosemary-garlic aioli and caramelized onions put it all over the top. Perfect for outdoor BBQs and fun gatherings of friends and family.

A pyramid stack of gourmet beef sliders on a wooden cutting board.

How To Make Gourmet Beef Sliders

There is just so much to love about these sliders.

You can also use this recipe for regular-sized burgers.

The Ingredients You Will Need

To make the best beef sliders of all time, you need to go with top-notch ingredients. Here’s what we recommend:

Butter – Unsalted
Onion – Large white or yellow, sliced
Beef – Ground top sirloin, brisket, and beef short ribs are excellent choices, 85% lean is best
Seasonings – Kosher salt and freshly ground pepper are all you need. For more flavor, try our homemade BBQ rub.
Sliced cheese – Provolone, gouda, or white cheddar are all great options
Buns – Fresh is best!
Rosemary and garlic aioli – If you can, make it with homemade mayonnaise!

EXPERT TIP: We like to cook the burgers out on our grill. But you can also cook them on a griddle or cast-iron skillet on the stove. Cook to 135°F for medium (slightly pink in the center). Try using the sous vide technique for the most perfectly cooked burger.

Several beef slider patties on a hot gas grill with smoke coming from below the grates.

Tips for Perfect Gourmet Beef Sliders

Choose the right beef: Use ground beef with a higher fat content, such as 80/20 or 85/15. This will ensure that the sliders are juicy and flavorful. Make sure to season the beef with salt and pepper before forming the patties. Use a meat grinder to ground top sirloin, brisket, and beef short ribs.

Make the rosemary-garlic aioli from scratch: Making the aioli from scratch will give your sliders a fresh and flavorful taste. Use fresh rosemary, garlic, and high-quality olive oil for the best results. You can also add a little lemon juice or Dijon mustard for extra flavor.

Caramelize the onions: Caramelizing the onions will add a sweet and savory flavor to the sliders. Slice the onions thinly and cook them over low heat with a little butter or oil until they are golden brown and tender. You can also add a pinch of sugar to help them caramelize.

Toast the buns and melt the cheese: To assemble the sliders, toast the buns lightly and melt the provolone cheese on top of the patties. This will add a crispy texture to the buns and make the cheese gooey and delicious. Spread the rosemary-garlic aioli on the buns and top the patties with the caramelized onions. Serve hot and enjoy!

A fork being used to place caramelized onions onto a beef slider topped with melted provolone cheese.

How To Serve

These sliders are always a crowd favorite.

You can prepare the aioli a few hours in advance (just give it a good stir before stirring), and you can make the caramelized onions in advance, too. Reheat on the stove until sizzling.

Get a nice big platter and stack the sliders. You will be amazed at how fast they go.

A close-up view of a slider that consists of a toasted slider bun with rosemary-garlic aioli, beef patty, melty provolone cheese, and topped with caramelized onions.

Other Classic Burger Recipes to Try

Nothing spells good times much more than a juicy, delicious burger. Here are some of our all-time favorites that you’ll want to try:

Smoked Steakhouse Burger
Rockin’ Black and Bleu Burger
Swiss and Mushroom Burger
Bulgogi Burgers with Kimchi
Epic “Big Mac” Copycat
Curry Turkey Burgers with Grilled Pineapple
Bratwurst Sliders with Beer Cheese
Salmon Burgers
Best-Ever Veggie Burger

These are all absolutely incredible, but in the meantime, isn’t the slider calling your name?

A close-up view of a gourmet beef slider on a toasted bun with a rosemary-garlic aioli sauce, melted provolone cheese, and caramelized onions.

Folks, you just will not believe the flavor of these gourmet sliders.

Epic hardly begins to describe it!

If you want to impress your guests, you must make these burgers. They are incredibly juicy, tasty, and so much fun!

A close-up view of a person holding a beef slider that has a bite taken out of it.

Ready to make the very best sliders in the entire world? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a picture of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag @HowToFeedaLoon!

A pyramid stack of gourmet beef sliders on a wooden cutting board.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Gourmet Beef Sliders

Gourmet Beef Sliders are amazing with caramelized onions, fresh sirloin beef, rosemary aioli, and melty provolone cheese! A guaranteed hit!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: American, Entree / Cookout
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 568kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas or charcoal grill, indoor grill, or cast-iron skillet (for the stove) or best results use the sous vide technique.

Ingredients

  • 1 cup rosemary aioli
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 3 large onions sliced
  • 1½ lbs ground sirloin 85%..formed into 2.5 ounce patties (for sliders)
  • Kosher salt and fresh ground black pepper
  • 8 slices provolone
  • slider buns

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Make the rosemary-garlic aioli and refrigerate (covered) for up to 1 day.

Make the Caramelized Onions

  • In a large skillet, melt the butter over medium heat.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Add the onions and cook until caramelized and browned, about 35 to 40 minutes. A pinch of salt and pepper and stir. Set aside, but keep warm.
    3 large onions

Prep and Cook the Burgers

  • Salt and pepper each side of the patties.
    1½ lbs ground sirloin, Kosher salt and fresh ground black pepper
  • Press an indention with your fingers/thumbs in the center of the patty.
  • Heat your grill to medium heat, or heat your skillet to medium heat. Or use your sous vide machine to heat to 145°F. Cook the meat until internal temperature reaches 145°F (for medium).
  • If using your cast-iron skillet, add 1 tablespoon of oil.
  • Once fully heated, add the patties. Cook on one side for about 4 minutes. Then flip. Cook on the other side for about 4 minutes.
  • In the last minute, add the cheese.
    8 slices provolone
  • Meanwhile, slice the buns, butter them, and place under the broiler for about 3 minutes (keep an eye on them! Time varies depending on oven).
    slider buns
  • Remove burgers from heat source.
  • Smear the aioli on each bottom bun. Place the burger on the aioli and then top it with a pile of warm caramelized onions. Place the top bun on the slider and serve at once.
    1 cup rosemary aioli

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you like the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
For the best burger, we recommend purchasing top sirloin, brisket, and/or beef short ribs, grinding the meat, and then forming the patties. For perfectly cooked burgers, use the sous vide technique. 
The rosemary-garlic aioli can be made a day in advance. Keep covered in the fridge and stir again before stirring. The onions can be made several hours in advance. Reheat on the stove over medium-low heat until sizzling. 

Nutrition

Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 184mg | Sodium: 610mg | Potassium: 746mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 338IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 471mg | Iron: 4mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally posted in April 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in May 2023!

Carrot and Raisin Salad

May 24, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

An oval white serving bowl filled with carrot and raisin salad with a gold serving spoon inserted on the side of the bowl.

We love side dishes that almost upstage the main dishes. In our books, this is one of those recipes.

The flavor of this salad is so satisfying.  The touch of curry may sound odd, but, it gives a depth to this salad that makes it one of our all-time favorites. Making homemade curry powder is easy and so wonderful!

An oval white serving bowl filled with carrot and raisin salad with a gold serving spoon inserted on the side of the bowl.

How To Make Carrot and Raisin Salad with Curry Dressing

You really will be surprised at how easy it is to make this carrot salad.

The dressing is simple, and as mentioned, the hint of curry is the perfect match against the sweet raisins and the flavorful carrots.

Store-bought curry is perfectly fine, but, honestly, there are so many types of curry powder, when you make your very own, you know exactly what you’re getting.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients for this wonderful salad are pretty simple. Fresh is best, but pre-packaged will work, too.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Mayonnaise – Homemade is easy and so good, but store-bought is just fine
Curry powder – Same as the mayo, it’s amazing how simple it is to make from scratch, but store-bought works, too
Salt – Kosher
Cayenne – A little adds a tiny kick, double or triple the amount for more heat
Lemon – Fresh is best
Carrots – Shredded. We love to use our food processor to shred fresh carrots, but packaged pre-shredded is perfectly fine
Raisins – Make sure they are fresh and very juicy
Parsley – Go with fresh here, if at all possible

EXPERT TIP: The dressing can be made up to 24 hours in advance. We do recommend letting the salad sit with the dressing for at least 1 hour in the refrigerator before serving.

A creamy curry dressing being poured over a bowl filled with raisins, chopped parsley, and strips of fresh carrots.

Tips for Perfect Carrot and Raisin Salad with Curry Dressing

Use fresh and high-quality ingredients: The success of any salad depends on the quality of the ingredients used. Make sure to use fresh and crisp carrots, plump and juicy raisins, and high-quality curry powder for the dressing.

Balance the flavors: The dressing should be well-balanced with the right amount of sweetness, tanginess, and spiciness. Taste the dressing before adding it to the salad and adjust the flavors as needed. You can add a little honey or maple syrup to balance the tanginess of the dressing.

Let it marinate: Once you have mixed the salad and dressing, let it sit in the refrigerator for at least an hour before serving. This will allow the flavors to meld together and the raisins to plump up.

An overhead view of an oval white serving bowl filled with carrot and raisin salad with curry dressing.

Other Side Salad Recipes to Try

This particular salad is always a hit when we serve it, especially at backyard BBQs, potlucks, and family gatherings. Here are some other side salads that always garner rave reviews:

Fresh Strawberry and Spinach Salad with Avocados
Creamy Horseradish Potato Salad
Warm Potato Salad with Bacon Vinaigrette
Avocado-Lime Slaw
Zesty Roasted Corn and Black Bean Salad
Cucumber and Dill Salad
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Basil
Cajun Pasta Salad

These are all amazing, but in the meantime, isn’t this salad calling your name?

A close-up view of a carrot and raisin salad with homemade curry dressing in a white serving bowl.

There are so many things to love about this incredible salad.

It’s not run-of-the-mill. It’s unique. And it also happens to be beautiful.

But most of all, it’s delicious.

A person using a large serving spoon to lift a helping of carrot and raisin salad from a bowl.

Ready to make the very best side salad in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon

An oval white serving bowl filled with carrot and raisin salad with a gold serving spoon inserted on the side of the bowl.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Carrot and Raisin Salad with Curry Dressing

This carrot and raisin salad is amazing. So unique and always a hit. The hint of curry gives this salad an amazing depth when mixed with the mayo and other ingredients. The dressing can be made up to 24 hours in advance.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Curry Powder Preparation20 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 368kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup mayonnaise
  • 2 teaspoon curry powder
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne
  • Juice of 1 lemon
  • 1 lb carrots peeled and shredded (about 4 cups)
  • 2 cups raisins
  • ¼ cup parsley fresh, chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium bowl, mix the mayonnaise with the curry, salt, cayenne, and lemon juice. Set aside.
    ¾ cup mayonnaise, 2 teaspoon curry powder, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon cayenne, Juice of 1 lemon
  • Place the carrots, raisins, and parsley in a large bowl. Pour the dressing over the top and then use a wooden spoon to stir until all ingredients are well coated.
    1 lb carrots, 2 cups raisins, ¼ cup parsley
  • Refrigerate for an hour or up to 4 hours to allow the flavors to develop. Give the salad a good stirring again before serving. Garnish with a little more parsley on top, if desired.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The dressing can be made up to 24 hours in advance. Keep covered in the fridge until ready to use. 
The salad can be assembled up to 4 hours before serving. Let the salad sit out for 30 minutes before serving. Toss well with a large spoon before serving. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for several days, although this salad is definitely best served the same day it's prepared. 
NOTE: If you make the mayo from scratch, remember: Although the risk of contracting illness from raw eggs is minimal, those with a compromised immune system should avoid consuming them.

Nutrition

Calories: 368kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 1020mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 12900IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in May 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe and new tips and photography with a fabulous new video in May 2023!
NOTE: This recipe is adapted from Chef Donald Link’s cookbook: Real Cajun.

Homemade Chicken Pad Thai

May 21, 2023 by Kris Longwell 9 Comments

Two white bowls filled with chicken pad Thai with a small bowl of peanuts nearby.

Thai food is so deep in flavor and steeped in tradition.

And this dish is about as classic as they come. Of course, we also love our Shrimp Pad Thai, but we love chicken, too. You may need to make a run to your local Asian market to grab an ingredient, or two, or just order them online. And this dish comes together quickly!

Two white bowls filled with chicken pad Thai with a small bowl of peanuts nearby.

How to Make Chicken Pad Thai

Like most stir-fry dishes, this dish comes together very quickly.

For that reason, it’s very important to have all of your ingredients prepped and ready to go before you start to stir-fry.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Many of the following ingredients can be found in the Asian section of most well-stocked supermarkets. If not, you can find them at an Asian market or online.

Here are the ingredients for chicken Pad Thai:

For the Sauce:
Tamarind sauce (or paste)
Fish sauce
Soy sauce
Brown sugar
Rice vinegar

For the Pad Thai:
Vegetable oil
Onion, chopped
Garlic, minced
Egg
Boneless, skinless chicken breast
Extra-firm tofu
Bean sprouts
Sriracha
Scallions
Chopped roasted peanuts
Lime

Substitutions:

  • If you cannot find flat rice noodles, you can use dried rice noodles or even spaghetti as a substitute.
  • For a vegetarian or vegan pad Thai, you can substitute the chicken with tofu or vegetables like mushrooms or broccoli.
  • If you cannot find fish sauce, you can use soy sauce and oyster sauce as a substitute.
  • For the rice vinegar, you can use white vinegar or apple cider vinegar as a substitute.
  • If you cannot find bean sprouts, you can use sliced cabbage or shredded carrots instead.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to push the cooked chicken and onions off to the side of your wok or skillet before adding the eggs. And then once you added the eggs, stir them constantly until they are nicely scrambled, and then incorporate them with the chicken and tofu. This only takes a couple of minutes.

A person adding a couple of raw eggs into a wok that has cooked chicken pieces and onion pushed to one side.

Tips for Perfect Chicken Pad Thai

Use fresh ingredients: The key to making delicious Pad Thai is using fresh and high-quality ingredients. Use fresh vegetables, high-quality chicken, and fresh herbs to enhance the flavor of the dish.

Soak the noodles properly: Soaking the noodles properly is crucial to achieving the perfect texture. Soak the noodles in warm water for at least 30 minutes before cooking to ensure they are soft and pliable.

Don’t overcook the chicken: Overcooking the chicken can make it dry and tough, which can ruin the dish. Cook the chicken just until it is no longer pink and remove it from the heat to avoid overcooking. You can add it back into the dish later to finish cooking.

EXPERT TIP: We can’t express enough the importance of mise en place (everything in place) for this dish. Once you start cooking, it cooks very quickly. You’ll need to have all ingredients prepped and ready to go, including putting together sauce.

A person pouring a tamarind and soy sauce mixture into a wok filled with noodles, chicken, peanuts, and tofu.

How To Serve

Chicken Pad Thai is typically served hot and garnished with chopped peanuts, lime wedges, and extra bean sprouts. If desired, you can also sprinkle on fresh herbs such as cilantro or Thai basil.

You can serve it in a large bowl or on individual plates.

To serve, simply ladle the Pad Thai into bowls or plates and sprinkle with the garnishes. The lime wedges can be squeezed over the dish to add a tangy flavor. It can be served as a main dish for lunch or dinner, and it pairs well with a side of steamed vegetables or a fresh salad. Enjoy it with a cold drink like iced tea or a cold beer to complete the meal.

An overhead view of chicken pad Thai that has just been stir-fried in a wok with a wooden spatula off to the side.

Other Classic Asian Recipes to Try

Asian cuisine is so delicious and deeply flavorful. Here are some of our favorites that you’ll want to make in your very own kitchen:

Shrimp Pad Thai
Thai Beef with Red Curry
Thai Beef Salad
Thai Green Curry Chicken
Korean Bulgogi Beef Lettuce Wraps
Kung Pao Shrimp
Chicken Pho
Pork Dumplings with Peanut Sauce
Vegetable Stir-Fry
Classic Chicken Fried Rice
Mongolian Beef

These are all so amazing, but aren’t you craving this bowl of deliciousness right now?

A straight-on view of a white bowl filled with chicken pad Thai topped with bean sprouts, scallions, and a lime wedge off to the side.

This dish is so delicious and simple to prepare.

It easily feeds 2 people with a little leftover. You can double the recipe to feed 4 to 6 hungry folks.

If you don’t have a wok, you can easily prepare the dish in a large skillet. Have fun!

A pair of chopsticks lifting rice noodles from a bowl filled with chicken pad Thai.

Ready to make the best Thai dish this side of Bangkok? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a white bowl filled with homemade chicken pad Thai with a pair of chopsticks on the side of the bowl.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Homemade Chicken Pad Thai

This is the ultimate Classic Chicken Pad Thai! So satisfying and real Thai flavor. If you can't find any of the ingredients in your local markets, they can easily be ordered online.
Prep Time25 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Thai
Servings: 2 people
Calories: 642kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Wok, or large sturdy skillet/pan

Ingredients

For Sauce

  • 3 tablespoon tamarind paste
  • 3 tablespoon fish sauce
  • 2 tablespoon soy sauce
  • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
  • 3 tablespoon brown sugar

For the Pad Thai

  • 6 oz rice noodles
  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • ½ onion
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 6 oz chicken breast cut into strips
  • 6 oz extra-firm tofu cut into bite-sized cubes
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 cup bean sprouts divided
  • 5 scallions cut into 1-inch strips
  • ½ cup roasted peanuts roughly chopped, divided
  • 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce more for extra heat
  • 1 lime cut into wedges, for garish

Instructions

  • Mix all of the sauce ingredients in a small bowl and set aside.
    3 tablespoon tamarind paste, 3 tablespoon fish sauce, 2 tablespoon soy sauce, 1 tablespoon rice vinegar, 3 tablespoon brown sugar
  • Meanwhile, bring 4 cups of water to a boil. Place the rice noodles in the boiling water and cook for 5 minutes, or until very soft, stirring occasionally. Drain and rinse with cool water. Set aside.
    6 oz rice noodles
  • Heat the oil in a wok over high heat. Add the onions and stir-fry for 2 minutes, or until just starting to soften. Add the garlic and cook for another 30 seconds, stirring often.
    2 tablespoon vegetable oil, ½ onion, 2 cloves garlic
  • Add the chicken and tofu and cook until the chicken is just cooked, about 2 to 4 minutes.
    6 oz chicken breast, 6 oz extra-firm tofu
  • Push the chicken mixture to one side of the wok and add the eggs to the other side. Use your spatula to constantly stir the eggs until cooked and scrambled. Mix the chicken mixture into the eggs.
    2 large eggs
  • Stir in half of the bean sprouts. Add the cooked noodles and stir to incorporate. Cook for about 1 minute.
    1 cup bean sprouts
  • Pour in the sauce, half of the peanuts, and the scallions. Stir to incorporate and cook for about 1 to 2 more minutes. Stir in the sriracha sauce.
    5 scallions, ½ cup roasted peanuts, 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
  • Serve immediately with the remaining peanuts and sprouts for garnish, as well as lime wedges.
    1 lime

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Tamarind sauce (or paste) can be found at your local Asian market or online (see link in the blog post). The fish sauce can be substituted with 2 tablespoon soy sauce and 1 tablespoon oyster sauce. (no need to add additional soy sauce). 
For added heat, increase the sriracha sauce and add 1 to 3 tablespoon of hot chili oil.
Leftovers will keep for several days, although this dish is definitely best served freshly from the wok. We don't recommend freezing pad Thai. 

Nutrition

Calories: 642kcal | Carbohydrates: 126g | Protein: 51g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 240mg | Sodium: 1498mg | Potassium: 1370mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 644IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 211mg | Iron: 6mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published March 2014, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in May 2023.

Easy Texas Sheet Cake

May 17, 2023 by Kris Longwell 1 Comment

A perfectly square piece of chocolate sheet cake topped with chopped pecans sitting on a white dessert plate.

If you’re looking for a quick and delicious dessert that’s sure to please, look no further.

This classic recipe is a crowd-pleaser that’s perfect for any occasion, from potlucks to family dinners. And the best part? It’s incredibly easy to make, even if you’re not an experienced baker. It’s the perfect dessert after a BBQ featuring favorites such as Black and Bleu Burgers, Chicken Kabobs, and BBQ Shrimp. The perfect ending to a perfect meal!

A perfectly square piece of chocolate sheet cake topped with chopped pecans sitting on a white dessert plate.

We love so many things about this incredible cake.

First and foremost is how delicious it is. But, it’s also so simple to prepare!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

Ingredients

When it comes to making this epic dessert, it’s important to have all the necessary ingredients on hand.

Here are the ingredients we will need for the cake:

  • Sugar – Granulated
  • Water – Room temperature
  • Oil – Canola or vegetable
  • Buttermilk – Either whole or low-fat will work
  • Butter – Unsalted
  • Eggs – Lightly beaten
  • Vanilla extract – We love Madagascar vanilla
  • Flour – All-purpose
  • Cocoa powder – Unsweetened
  • Cinnamon – Ground
  • Baking soda – check the expiration date, make sure it’s fresh
  • Salt – Kosher

Here are the ingredients we will need for the icing:

  • Butter – Unsalted
  • Milk – Whole
  • Confectioners’ sugar – Also known as Powdered Sugar
  • Cocoa powder – Unsweetened
  • Vanilla extract – We love Madagascar vanilla
  • Salt – Kosher
  • Cinnamon – Ground
  • Chopped pecans – Optional, use as many or as little as you desire

EXPERT TIP: Traditionally, this cake is baked in what’s referred to as a half sheet pan. The dimensions are 13″x18.” You can also make it in a 10″x15″ pan, but the cake will be thicker because the pan is not as large. You can also make this in 9×13 dish, but you won’t get the traditional thickness for the cake.

A liquid chocolate cake batter poured from a glass bowl into a half sheet pan.

The Tools You Will Need

Before you get started, let’s make sure you have all the necessary equipment. Here’s what you’ll need:

  • A 13×18-inch half-sheet pan (or jelly roll pan). A 10×15-inch or standard baking pan will work in a pinch. 
  • Non-stick cooking spray
  • Mixing bowls
  • Whisk or electric mixer
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Spatula
  • Toothpick

EXPERT TIP: It’s important to pour the icing over the cooled cake while it’s still warm. We let the cake rest in the pan for 10 minutes to cool before adding the icing. This gives you just enough time to prepare the icing as soon as the cake comes out of the oven. Then, for clean slicing, let the cake cool completely before cutting.

Warm chocolate frosting being transferred with a red spatula from a glass bowl onto the top of a chocolate Texas sheet cake in a sheet pan on a baking rack.

Tips and Tricks

Making a Texas Sheet Cake is easy, but there are a few tips and tricks that can help you get the perfect texture and flavor every time. Here are some tips that we’ve learned over the years:

  • Use good quality cocoa powder. The chocolate flavor is the star of this cake, so it’s important to use a cocoa powder that you love. We like to use Dutch-processed cocoa powder for a richer, more intense chocolate flavor.
  • Don’t overmix the batter. Overmixing can lead to a tough, dense cake. Mix the batter just until everything is combined and there are no lumps.
  • Use room temperature ingredients. This helps everything mix together more easily and can lead to a more evenly baked cake.
  • Let the cake cool for at least 10 minutes before frosting. If the cake is too hot, the frosting can melt and slide off. Letting it cool ensures that the frosting will stick and stay put.
  • Warm the frosting before spreading it on the cake. This helps the frosting spread more easily and creates a smooth, glossy finish. You can warm the frosting in the microwave or on the stovetop.
  • Store the cake at room temperature. This cake is best enjoyed within a day or two of baking, but it can be stored at room temperature in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
  • Freeze the cake for longer storage. If you want to keep the cake for longer, it can be frozen for up to 3 months. Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and then in foil to prevent freezer burn.

By following these tips and tricks, you’ll be able to make an Easy Texas Sheet Cake that is perfectly moist, chocolatey, and delicious every time.

An overhead view of a sheet pan half filled with Texas sheet cake that has been cut into squares with a metal spatula holding one of the square near the edge of the pan.

Variations and Additions

When it comes to Texas Sheet Cake, the possibilities for variations and additions are endless. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

Chocolate Cake Variations

While the classic cake is made with chocolate cake, you can switch things up by using different cake flavors. Try making a vanilla sheet cake, or a marble sheet cake by swirling chocolate and vanilla cake batter together. You can also add in different mix-ins like chocolate chips or chopped nuts.

Flour Options

Most Texas Sheet Cake recipes call for all-purpose flour, but you can experiment with different types of flour for a slightly different texture and flavor. Try using cake flour for a lighter, more tender crumb, or whole wheat flour for a nuttier, heartier cake.

Icing Options

While the classic Texas Sheet Cake is topped with rich chocolate icing, you can switch things up by using different icing flavors. Try making a vanilla icing, or a cream cheese icing for a tangy twist. You can also experiment with different textures and consistencies, like a glaze or a whipped frosting.

Nutty Additions

Chopped walnuts are a classic addition to Texas Sheet Cake, but you can switch things up by using different nuts or adding in other mix-ins. Try using pecans, almonds, or hazelnuts, or adding in shredded coconut or dried fruit.

Cake Box Mixes

If you’re short on time or ingredients, you can use a cake box mix as the base. Simply follow the instructions on the box, and add in any mix-ins or variations that you like. It’s a quick and easy way to make a delicious sheet cake without any fuss.

A square slice of Texas sheet cake being raised from the pan with a metal spatula.

Other Classic Dessert Recipes to Try

This Texas Sheet Cake is without a doubt one of our all-time favorite desserts to prepare and is always such a huge hit. But these classics are true winners, too:

Lemon Meringue Pie
Chocolate Delight
Classic Cherry Pie
Pineapple Upside Down Cake
Banana Pudding Trifle
Red, White, and Blue Trifle
Old Fashioned Peach Cobbler
Key Lime Pie
Chocolate Meringue Pie
German Chocolate Cake

These are absolutely knock-out recipes. And folk, just look at this cake. Aren’t you craving this right now?

A close-up view of a square piece of Texas sheet cake with a bite of it missing and a fork sitting nearby.

Ready to make a cake that folks will be raving about for days and weeks to come? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a square piece of Texas sheet cake with a bite of it missing and a fork sitting nearby.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Easy Texas Sheet Cake

This sheet cake is without a doubt one of the most crowd-pleasing desserts we've ever served. It's simple to prepare and feeds a crowd. Cut the squares to your own liking, but we typically cut them into 4 rows by 6 rows, which gives you 24 pieces of cake.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American, American Southern
Servings: 12
Calories: 458kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 half sheet pan 13"x18" (can also use 10"x15" or regular baking sheet)
  • Cooking spray

Ingredients

For the Cake

  • 2 cups sugar
  • 1 cup water
  • ½ cup canola oil
  • ½ cup buttermilk
  • ½ cup unsalted butter melted
  • 2 large eggs lightly beaten
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 2 cups all-purpose flour
  • ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon ground
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Warm Chocolate Frosting

  • ½ cup unsalted butter
  • ⅓ cup whole milk
  • 1 lb confectioners' sugar 4 cups
  • ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon cinnamon ground
  • 1 cup pecans chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the sugar, 1 cup water, oil, buttermilk, melted butter, eggs, and vanilla. Set aside.
    2 cups sugar, 1 cup water, ½ cup canola oil, ½ cup buttermilk, ½ cup unsalted butter, 2 large eggs, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • In another bowl, whisk together the flour, cocoa, cinnamon, baking soda, and salt.
    2 cups all-purpose flour, ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, 1 teaspoon baking soda, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Slowly stir the flour mixture into the wet mixture and continue stirring until smooth and fully combined (it's okay if there are a few bubbles or bumps).
  • Spray the sheet pan with cooking spray.
  • Transfer the cake batter to the pan and smooth it out with a spatula.
  • Bake for 20 minutes, or until an inserted toothpick comes out clean. Remove from oven and let rest for 10 minutes. Make the warm chocolate frosting immediately.

Make the Warm Chocolate Frosting

  • In a medium-sized saucepan, melt the butter with the milk over medium-low heat.
    ½ cup unsalted butter, ⅓ cup whole milk
  • Turn off the heat and stir in the confectioners' sugar, cocoa, vanilla, salt, and cinnamon until silky smooth.
    1 lb confectioners' sugar, ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon cinnamon
  • Pour the warm frosting over the cooled cake and smooth with a spatula. Top with chopped pecans, if using.
    1 cup pecans

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
We recommend that all of the ingredients be at room temperature when making the batter, however, if you forget to set anything out, you'll still be okay. The cake has a slightly better texture when all ingredients are room temp. 
Be sure to let the cake cool for at least 10 minutes before adding the warm icing.  The cake can be made up to 24 hours in advance before icing. Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and make sure it's room temperature before making the warm chocolate icing. 
Leftovers will keep covered for up to 5 days and can be frozen for up to 1 month. 

Nutrition

Calories: 458kcal | Carbohydrates: 92g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 74mg | Sodium: 219mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 72g | Vitamin A: 550IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

Southern-Style Crab Cakes

May 11, 2023 by Kris Longwell 43 Comments

A close-up view of a Southern-style crab cake simmering on a hot cast-iron flat skillet.

There are crab cakes, and then there are these babies. Insanely good.

This dish is popular on so many seafood and fine-dining restaurant menus around the world, but, especially in the New England region of the U.S. (non-spicy) and in Louisiana (a little spicy). This version has a little bit of kick, but not too much, and is truly crab-forward. Meaning, the crab is the absolute star. 

A close-up view of a Southern-style crab cake simmering on a hot cast-iron flat skillet.

How To Make Southern-Style Crab Cakes

There are a few tips and tricks that will ensure you produce the most delicious crab cakes. We’ll show you what works for us. 

But probably even more important than the technique of preparing them, is the quality of the ingredients and balancing them just right to achieve crab perfection. We’ll review that, too. 

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Again, the key ingredient for this dish is the crab. See below for our recommendations.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Lump Crabmeat – We recommend seeking our Blue Crab. It’s from the Gulf of Mexico and is sweet and not overly “crabby” tasting. It’s a bit pricey, but so worth it. However, any type of regular lump crabmeat will work. We don’t recommend jumbo lump crabmeat
Butter – Unsalted
Onion – Finely chopped
Poblano pepper – Finely chopped, can also substitute fresh jalapeño or serraño, but be sure to remove the seeds for less heat. Poblanos are mild and jalapeños and serranos carry much more heat.
Garlic – Minced
Seasonings – Chili powder, cayenne pepper, black pepper, salt
Mayonnaise – Our favorite is Dukes, but whatever your favorite is will work
Mustard – Stone ground (or whole ground) is fantastic, but again, any kind will be great
Hot sauce – Such as Louisiana, Crystals, or Tobasco – Add more or less, depending on your desired spice level
Scallions – Green and white parts, thinly sliced
Parsley – Fresh, Italian (flat-leaf), chopped
Lemon juice – Preferably fresh, from half of one lemon
Breadcrumbs – We remove the crusts from a demi-baguette and then pulverize it in our food processor. We love the texture of fresh breadcrumbs, but store-bought will work, too. Regular or Panko are both fine choices
Oil – Vegetable is perfect for lightly frying the cakes, but canola and peanut oil will work wonderfully, as well
Dipping sauce – Jalepeño remoulade is spectacular. See the ingredients below and in the recipe card

Southern Style Crab Cakes recipe

Tips for Perfect Southern-Style Crab Cakes

Quality Crabmeat – The crab cakes are really as good as the quality of the crabmeat. This could be considered one of those “special occasion” dishes. In our eyes, it’s worth it to spend a little more on the best crabmeat available. Gulf Coast blue crabmeat is our favorite and can be found a food markets like Whole Foods or online. Ask your fishmonger for a good recommendation.

Allow the Cakes to Chill – This is very important. The crab cake mixture is intentionally somewhat loose. This allows the crab to really be the prominent ingredient and component. Forming the cakes and then letting the chill for at least 30 minutes allows them to firm up and makes cooking them easier. It’s okay if they break apart somewhat when frying them. The taste is worth it.

Serve with a Sauce – These cakes are spectacular on their own, no doubt. But the addition of a remoulade honestly puts them over the top. More on that below.

Southern Style Crab Cakes recipe

How To Serve

These are definitely best served fresh off the griddle. You can form the cakes up to 2 or 3 hours before cooking them but wait until just before serving to fry them up.

Frying them in batches may be necessary. If that’s the case, keep cooked cakes on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper in an oven that has been preheated to 275°F.

Serve them with the traditional accompaniments. Sliced lemon is a must. Louisiana hot sauce is strongly recommended. And a good remoulade (or sauce) puts them over the top. Our favorite is the Jalepeño Remoulade. Simply mix the following together in a bowl and chill for 30 minutes or overnight:

Jalepaño Remoulade Ingredients

A small jalepeño, seeded and finely diced
A small onion, finely chopped
1 scallion, finely sliced
1 cup mayonnaise
½ teaspoon salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper
¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper
2 tablespoon red wine vinegar
Juice of 1 lime

EXPERT TIP: We use our English muffin rings to form the cakes. However, use whatever you have on hand. A 1-cup measuring cup works wonderfully! You can help shape them with your hands, too, before placing them in the refrigerator.

Southern Style Crab Cakes recipe

Other Classic Seafood Dishes To Try

We love all kinds of seafood dishes, and here are some of our favorite recipes we think you’ll enjoy, too.

New England-Style Crab Cakes
Sautéed Soft-Shell Crabs
Jumbo Lump Crab Au Gratin
Almond-Crusted Cod with Orange Sauce
Parmesan Cod with Romesco Sauce
Mediterranean Baked Red Snapper
Seared Tuna Steaks with Tomatoes and Olives
Salmon Puttanesca
Veracruz-Style Shrimp Enchiladas with Pumpkin (Pepian) Sauce
Spanish Shrimp with Garlic
Cajun Baked Shrimp
Grilled Swordfish Steaks
Classic Fish ‘n Chips

These are all amazing. But aren’t you craving these right now? Yum!

A close-up view of a Southern-style crab cake with a drizzle of jalepeño remoulade poured over the top and a lemon wedge next to it.

If you like crab cakes, and you like just a little bit of kick, then these Southern-Style Crab Cakes are going to rock your world. And everyone you serve them to.

They make for a wonderful appetizer or even as a main course. You can easily freeze any of the crab cake filling that you don’t use.

If you’re looking for a crab cake that isn’t heavy and gets lost in too much breading and other ingredients, this is the recipe you’ve been looking for. Every bite is a true taste sensation.

A close-up view of a crab cake topped with a jalapeño remoulade and has been half eaten.

Ready to make the best crab cakes this side of the Gulf of Mexico? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a crab cake topped with a jalapeño remoulade and has been half eaten.
Print Recipe
4.88 from 16 votes

Southern-Style Crab Cakes

These Southern Style Crab Cakes are simply the bomb. Serve with some Jalapeno Remoulade, and you will not believe how incredible these are. Truly something special.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Chill time30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer or Entree
Cuisine: Seafood / Southern
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 426kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Large cast iron skillet or a Mexican camal
  • Rings to form the crab cakes or just use a circular measuring cup, or even a lid from a jar

Ingredients

  • 1 lb lump crabmeat Preferably blue crabmeat
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup onion finely chopped
  • ¼ cup poblano pepper stemmed, seeded and finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper more for extra heat, less for little heat
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 egg lightly beaten
  • ⅓ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon whole-grain mustard
  • Louisiana hot sauce several dashes
  • 2 scallions white and green parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped
  • Juice from ½ lemon about 1 tbsp
  • ¾ cup bread crumbs divided, fresh, if possible. See NOTES
  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil plus more as needed

Jalapeño Remoulade

  • 1 small jalapeño pepper stemmed, seeded, and finely chopped
  • 2 scallions white parts only, thinly sliced
  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
  • 2 teaspoon red wine vinegar
  • Juice of 1 lime

Instructions

  • Place the crab meat in a large mixing bowl and carefully pick through for shells, then set aside.
    1 lb lump crabmeat
  • Melt the butter in a medium skillet over medium-high heat.
    1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Add the onion, poblano, garlic, salt, chili powder, black pepper, and cayenne and cook, stirring, until the veggies are soft - about 4 minutes.
    ¼ cup onion, ¼ cup poblano pepper, 2 cloves garlic, ½ teaspoon chili powder, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, 1 teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • Transfer the veggie mixture to a mixing bowl and set aside to cool for about 15 minutes.
  • In a large bowl, gently mix together the crab, cooled vegetable mixture, egg, mayonnaise, mustard, hot sauce, scallions, parsley, lemon juice, and ⅓ cup of the breadcrumbs.
    1 egg, ⅓ cup mayonnaise, 1 teaspoon whole-grain mustard, Louisiana hot sauce, 2 scallions, 2 tablespoon Italian parsley, Juice from ½ lemon, ¾ cup bread crumbs
  • Using a 1-cup measuring cup, form the mixture into cakes, packing gently; they should resemble hockey pucks (in size) - about 2 inches thick.
  • Cover the cakes and chill for 30 minutes, or overnight (covered with plastic wrap).
  • When you are ready to cook the crab cakes, place the remaining breadcrumbs on a plate.
  • Dredge both sides of each cake in the crumbs, shaking off the excess.
  • Heat 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
    2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • When the oil is hot, but not smoking, fry the crab cakes for 4 to 5 minutes on each side, until golden brown.
  • Don't overcrowd the pan - fry in batches if necessary, adding more oil if needed.
  • Serve immediately - with Jalapeno Remoulade!

JALEPENO REMOULAD

  • Whisk together all the ingredients in a mixing bowl.
    1 small jalapeño pepper, 2 scallions, 1 cup mayonnaise, ½ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes, 2 teaspoon red wine vinegar, Juice of 1 lime
  • Cover and place in the fridge until needed...or for at least 30 minutes.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post (to come) for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
These crab cakes are intentionally somewhat "loose." There's not a ton of breadcrumbs or mayo. They have a tendency to come apart (a bit) while frying. Flip them gently, and use a spatula to press them together while cooking. It's okay if they come apart somewhat. The taste is well worth it. 
You will most likely need to fry up the crab cakes in a couple of batches. Simply place the first batch on a baking sheet lined with parchment or wax paper and place it in a 275°F oven while you prepare the remaining batch. 
For the breadcrumbs, we take a demi-baguette and cut off the hard edges (crust). Then tear it apart and pulverize it in our food processor. We love the taste and texture of fresh breadcrumbs, however, store-bought will work, too. Regular or Panko are both fine choices.
Be sure to pick the crab over and remove any extra shells or cartilage. 
Uncooked crab cake mixture freezes beautifully for up to 2 months. 
These crab cakes are definitely best served right off the griddle, but leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for a couple of days. Reheat in a low-temp oven or in a skillet. 

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 12g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 127mg | Sodium: 968mg | Potassium: 410mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 790IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 3mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published December 2014, but was updated with new tweaks to the recipe with new photos and tips and a fabulous new video in May 2024.
NOTE: This recipe is adapted from the brilliant Chef Donald Link.

Chicken and Rice Casserole with Broccoli and Cheese

May 7, 2023 by Kris Longwell 6 Comments

A close-up view of a 9 by 13 baking dish filled with a chicken and rice casserole with broccoli and cheese.

If you love a good casserole as much as we do, you are going to flip for this one.

We’ve ditched the canned condensed soup and opted for an incredible fontina cheese bechamel sauce layered with rice, broccoli, and shredded roasted chicken. We’ll even show you shortcuts that can make this incredible casserole easy to make for a quick weeknight dinner. Serve with a green leaf salad and cloverleaf rolls for the perfect Sunday dinner!

A close-up view of a 9 by 13 baking dish filled with a chicken and rice casserole with broccoli and cheese.

How To Make Chicken with Rice Casserole with Broccoli and Cheese

This really is the quintessential Sunday night dinner.

It takes some time for all the prep, but it’s so worth the extra effort. However, see below for some shortcuts that will cut the time dramatically, but not the taste.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

We’re going to include shortcuts you can take with the following ingredients to make preparation faster. We love the original version best, but the shortcuts still deliver an amazingly delicious casserole.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Butter – Unsalted
Onion – Chopped
Garlic – Minced
Flour – All-purpose
Chicken broth – Homemade or store-bought
Half and half – Can substitute whole milk or heavy cream
Fontina cheese – Grated, can substitute Gruyere, cheddar, or Colby Jack
Thyme – Dried (1 tsp) or fresh (1 tbsp)
Dijon mustard – Can use stone ground or grain mustard for a more pronounced taste
Salt – Kosher
Pepper – Freshly ground
Lemon juice – Freshly squeezed or bottled is fine
Cooked chicken – From a rotisserie chicken or roasted in your oven (with a little olive oil, salt, and pepper)
Cooked long-grain rice – Can substitute instant (Minute) rice
Broccoli florets – Fresh is best, but can substitute frozen
Bread crumbs – Fresh is our favorite, but you can substitute purchased breadcrumbs, crushed buttery crackers, or crushed cornflakes

EXPERT TIP: Use your favorite melting cheese. Stir it directly into the bechamel sauce and stir until melted. The only melting cheese we wouldn’t recommend is mozzarella.

A person dropping a handful of finely shredded fontina cheese in a skillet filled with a creamy bechamel sauce.

Tips for Perfect Chicken and Rice Casserole with Broccoli and Cheese

Vary the Components – This casserole is so versatile and it’s great with all types of ingredients. Try any of the following combinations (in place or combined with the chicken, rice, broccoli, and cheese): Sautéd mushrooms, shredded turkey, grilled Kielbasa, cauliflower, cream cheese

Make Ahead – The recipe takes some time to prepare as written. However, it can be completely assembled up to 48 hours in advance (leave the breadcrumbs off until ready to bake). Cover with plastic wrap and keep in the fridge. If baking chilled, you may need to increase the cooking time by another 10 to 15 minutes.

Keep an Eye on the Breadcrumbs – Toasted breadcrumbs really put this casserole over the top. They should be nicely browned after 30 to 40 minutes of baking. Turn the casserole around in the oven halfway through. If they didn’t brown enough, you can turn on the broiler on HIGH for a minute or two, but keep an eye on it, it will burn in a matter of seconds!

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to bake the casserole in a greased 9″x13″ dish. Before baking, the mixture will be thick and not very pourable. Use a large spoon or spatula to transfer from the skillet to the dish. As the casserole bakes, it will become creamy and bubbly.

A person using a wooden spatula to transfer the contents of chicken and rice casserole into a 9 by 13 white baking dish.

How To Serve

This casserole is practically a meal in and of itself.

A nice green leaf salad with your favorite salad dressing is the perfect addition. Homemade rolls round out the perfect Sunday dinner or dinner party.

We make this casserole for a Sunday dinner and then enjoy leftovers all week. However, if it’s too much casserole for you, the recipe can easily be cut in half.

An overhead view of a 9 by 13 white baking dish filled with a chicken and rice casserole topped with toasted breadcrumbs and flanked with a bowl of a green leaf salad and a basket of bread pieces.

Other Casserole Recipes To Try

Everyone loves a good casserole. They are comforting and easily feed a hungry family. Here are some of our favorites that you would likely love, too:

Mexican Lasagna Casserole
Chicken and Sage Casserole
King Ranch Casserole
Chili Cheese Dog Casserole
Best Tuna Casserole
Turkey and Dressing Casserole
Classic Rice, Cheddar, and Broccoli Casserole
Best Yellow Squash Casserole
Corn Casserole

These are all awesome, but isn’t this one calling your name right now?

A large spoon is used to raise a helping of chicken and rice casserole with broccoli and cheese from of baking dish filled with the casserole.

There is just so much to love about this chicken and rice casserole. You can take the shortcuts listed above and it’s an easy weeknight meal.

It’s really one of the best Sunday dinners we’ve ever made or eaten. And remember, you can make it in advance, and then just bake it for about 30 to 45 minutes for an amazing meal, whenever you want it!

And it is truly as gorgeous in presentation as it is delicious in taste. We always get rave reviews when we make it for family or friends, and you will, too!

A dinner plate filled with a serving of chicken and rice casserole sitting next to a green leaf salad and several slices of cucumber.

Ready to make a dish that your family will be requesting on a regular basis? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a 9 by 13 baking dish filled with a chicken and rice casserole with broccoli and cheese.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Chicken and Rice Casserole with Broccoli and Cheese

This casserole is comfort food at its very best. It takes a little time to prep all the components, but it's so worth the effort. You can also assemble it up to several days in advance. We also provide some shortcuts if you're pressed for time. This is a favorite in our house and we think it will become one in yours, too.
Prep Time1 hour hr
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Resting time10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 10
Calories: 684kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 9"x13" baking dish

Ingredients

  • 4 cups chicken cooked, shredded from a rotisserie
  • 4 cups long-grain rice cooked
  • ¾ cup unsalted butter 1½ sticks
  • 4 cup broccoli florets from 1 or 2 broccoli heads
  • 1½ cup onion chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1½ cup chicken broth
  • 1½ cup half and half or whole milk or heavy cream
  • 8 oz fontina cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 2½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • cooking spray or softened butter
  • 2 cups bread crumbs fresh
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Shred the chicken from the rotisserie, steam the rice, and blanch the broccoli florets in boiling water for 1 minute, and then transfer to an ice bath. Set all of this to the side.
    4 cups chicken, 4 cups long-grain rice, 4 cup broccoli florets

Make the Casserole

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • In a large saucepan, melt the butter over medium heat. Add the onions and sauté until soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for another 30 seconds, stirring often.
    ¾ cup unsalted butter, 1½ cup onion, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the flour and stir constantly with a wooden spatula for about 2 minutes.
    ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • Whisk in the broth and half and half, whisking constantly to remove any lumps. Use a wooden spatula or spoon to stir until thickened, about 2 to 3 minutes.
    1½ cup chicken broth, 1½ cup half and half
  • Stir in the cheese and continue stirring until melted.
    8 oz fontina cheese
  • Turn off the heat and stir in the thyme, Dijon, salt, pepper, and lemon juice.
    1 teaspoon dried thyme, 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 2½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • Stir in the chicken, rice, and broccoli and continue stirring until fully mixed. Spray your baking dish with cooking spray and then transfer the mixture into the dish (it will be very thick).
    cooking spray
  • In a medium-sized bowl, toss the bread crumbs with the 2 tablespoon of melted butter. Sprinkle the buttered breadcrumbs over the casserole.
    2 cups bread crumbs, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Bake the casserole for 30 to 40 minutes, or until bubbly and the breadcrumbs are toasty and lightly browned.
  • Let rest for 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Depending on the size of your rotisserie chicken, you may need to pick up two of them. If you have more than four cups of shredded chicken, save it for another use. 
You can use any kind of melting cheese such as Gruyere, gouda (not smoked), cheddar (white or yellow), or Colby Jack. We don't recommend using mozzarella.
To save time, you can substitute the long-grain rice with minute (or instant) rice and you can use frozen (thawed) broccoli in place of fresh. 
The casserole can be assembled up to 3 days in advance. Cover with plastic wrap and keep in the fridge until ready to bake. Add the breadcrumbs just before baking.  It can also be frozen before baking for up to 2 months. Allow to thaw completely before baking. If baking a chilled casserole, add another 10 to 15 minutes, or until bubbly (cover with foil if the topping is browning too much). 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 5 to 6 days. Reheat in a 350°F until heat through, or cook on HIGH in the microwave for 1 to 2 minutes. 

Nutrition

Calories: 684kcal | Carbohydrates: 87g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 98g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 99mg | Sodium: 942mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1096IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 263mg | Iron: 3mg

Authentic Tex-Mex Beef Tacos

May 3, 2023 by Kris Longwell 38 Comments

Two rows of crispy beef tacos resting on two taco holders with chopped tomatoes and shredded cheese scattered around them.

Growing up in Texas, eating Tex-Mex was literally a way of life! We love all the classics like cheese enchiladas with ancho sauce and chicken quesadillas. But these crispy Authentic Tex-Mex Beef Tacos are at the top of our list. They are fun to make and simply incredible in taste and texture!

Two rows of crispy beef tacos resting on two taco holders with chopped tomatoes and shredded cheese scattered around them.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

These simple, everyday ingredients come together to create bold, authentic Tex-Mex flavor with the perfect balance of spice, richness, and freshness in every bite. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Tex-Mex beef tacos on a grey wooden background including ground beef, onions,, garlic, beef broth, tomatoes, seasonings, cheese, lettuce, vegetable oil, and corn tortillas.

🌶️ Ingredient Notes & Variations

  • Ground Beef: Use 80/20 ground beef for the juiciest taco meat. Leaner beef works too—just don’t skip the simmering step to keep it moist and flavorful.
  • Seasonings: Classic Tex-Mex spices like chili powder, cumin, and smoked paprika give that signature warmth. Adjust the spice level by adding more chili powder or a pinch of cayenne.
  • Tomatoes: Ro-Tel or any diced tomatoes with green chilies add a tangy, slightly spicy kick. For a milder version, use plain diced tomatoes.
  • Tortillas: Corn tortillas bring the most authentic flavor, but flour tortillas work well for a softer taco. You can also bake your shells instead of frying for a lighter twist.
  • Cheese Options: Shredded cheddar, Monterey Jack, or a Mexican blend all melt beautifully over the warm beef.
  • Toppings: Keep it classic with lettuce, tomato, and salsa, or add guacamole, sour cream, or pickled jalapeños for extra Tex-Mex flair.
  • Make It Ahead: The taco meat can be made a day in advance and reheated—perfect for quick weeknight dinners or meal prep.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips & Tricks for the Best Tex-Mex Beef Tacos

  • Let the spices bloom: After adding your seasonings, cook them for about 30 seconds before adding liquid — this deepens the flavor and gives the meat that true Tex-Mex aroma.
  • Don’t skip the flour: A small spoonful helps the sauce cling to the beef, creating that saucy, restaurant-style texture.
  • Simmer, don’t boil: Keep the heat low so the flavors meld together and the sauce thickens without drying out the meat.
  • Drain the grease (but not all of it): Leaving just a little fat behind adds richness and keeps the taco filling juicy.
  • Fry the shells fresh: Homemade fried corn tortillas make a huge difference in flavor and crunch — they’re worth the extra step!
  • Keep shells warm: Place fried shells on a wire rack in a low oven (around 200°F/95°C) while you finish the rest to keep them crisp.
  • Add toppings right before serving: This keeps lettuce crisp, cheese melty, and everything tasting fresh.
  • Double the batch: The taco meat freezes beautifully — perfect for quick weeknight dinners or Tex-Mex meal prep.
  • Customize the heat: Add diced jalapeños, chipotle powder, or hot sauce if you like it spicy, or keep it mild for family-friendly tacos.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Authentic Tex-Mex Beef Tacos

A large silver skillet filled with chopped onions that are being sautéed on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Sauté the onions in the oil over medium heat until soft.
A large silver skillet filled with cooked ground beef that is mixed with chopped sautéed onions on gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add the meat and cook until no longer pink. Safely discard all but about 1 tablespoon of the rendered grease.
A person adding Tex-Mex seasonings and flour to cooked ground beef in a large skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the seasonings and the flour and cook, stirring often, for 1 to 2 minutes.
A close-up view of Tex-Mex taco meat being stirred in a skillet with a large wooden spoon.
  1. Step 4: Add the tomatoes and broth and cook until most of the liquid is gone. The texture should be wet, but not runny.
A person holding up a freshly fried taco shell in a metal taco shell mold.
  1. Step 5: Fry the tortillas in 350°F oil until crispy.
A person holding an authentic Tex-Mex beef taco that is topped with shredded cheese, chopped lettuce and tomatoes, and a spoonful of salsa.
  1. Step 6: Serve with all the fixings!

Expert Tip

It’s important not to over-simmer the taco meat — that’s the key to getting the perfect texture. After draining off any excess grease, stir in your seasonings, then add about half a can of Ro-Tel and the beef broth. Let the mixture simmer gently for around 10 minutes, just until it thickens slightly. The filling should be moist and saucy, but not runny — rich enough to hold together in the taco shell without being dry.

😋 How to Serve

  • Use taco holders: For easy assembly and a beautiful presentation, place your taco shells in a taco holder to keep them upright while filling and serving. It helps prevent spills and keeps those crispy shells intact.
  • Keep everything warm: Set out your taco meat, shells, and toppings buffet-style so everyone can build their own tacos while everything stays fresh and warm.
  • Add fresh toppings: Offer a variety of toppings like shredded lettuce, diced tomatoes, chopped onions, fresh cilantro, sliced jalapeños, shredded cheese, sour cream, and homemade salsa.
  • Serve with classic sides: Round out your Tex-Mex spread with Mexican rice, refried beans, or charro beans for a hearty, restaurant-style meal.
  • Don’t forget the extras: A side of guacamole, queso dip, or chips and homemade salsa makes the meal feel festive and complete.
  • Add a squeeze of lime: A wedge of fresh lime over each taco brightens the flavors and balances the spices.
  • Pair with drinks: Serve with classic margaritas, cold Mexican beer, or a refreshing agua fresca for the perfect Tex-Mex experience.
  • Finish with dessert: End the meal on a sweet note with churros or flan.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How can I keep the taco shells from cracking when making Tex-Mex Beef Tacos?

When frying corn tortillas with a taco mold, avoid squeezing the mold too tightly — that’s what usually causes cracking. Let the tortilla form gently around the mold and fry just until golden and crisp. Also, make sure your oil is hot enough (about 350°F/175°C) so the shells cook evenly and don’t become brittle.

Can I make Tex-Mex Beef Tacos ahead of time?

Yes! You can prepare the seasoned beef filling up to a day in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge and reheat gently before serving. For the best texture, fry the taco shells fresh right before assembling.

What’s the best type of tortilla to use for Tex-Mex Beef Tacos?

Corn tortillas deliver the most authentic flavor and crispiness, but flour tortillas are great if you prefer a softer taco. Just warm them lightly before filling to prevent tearing.

Can I make Tex-Mex Beef Tacos less spicy?

Absolutely. Simply reduce the chili powder or skip the Ro-Tel with green chilies. The tacos will still be flavorful without the extra heat.

How do I store leftover Tex-Mex Beef Tacos?

Keep the beef filling separate from the shells to maintain crispness. Store the meat in the refrigerator for up to three days and reheat before serving. Fry or warm fresh shells when ready to enjoy again.

🌮 More Amazing Taco Recipes

  • An arrangement of ingredients for grilled tacos al pastor on a white background including dried chiles, spices, pineapple, pork shoulder, sugar, vinegar, and corn tortillas.
    Grilled Tacos al Pastor
  • A row of easy chicken tinga tacos sitting next to each other on a wooden platter topped with crumbled cheese and garnish with lime wedges.
    Easy Chicken Tinga Tacos
  • A stack of four taco quesadillas that have been cut in half so the meat filling is visible.
    Taco Quesadillas
  • An overhead view of three fish tacos sitting on a green platter next to lime wedges and a bowl of pico de gallo.
    Baja Fish Tacos

Ready to make the best tacos this side of the Rio Grande? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

Six Tex-Mex Beef Tacos sitting up-right in two taco stands sitting on a cutting board surrounded by bowls of traditional toppings.
Print Recipe
4.92 from 12 votes

Authentic Tex-Mex Beef Tacos

These authentic beef Tex-Mex tacos are perfect for a taco dinner party! Make the beef filling ahead of time…do the tortillas 1 or 2 hours before your guests arrive…serve with your favorite Tex-Mex sides.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Tex-Mex, Mexican, TexMex
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 333kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Deep-fryer or skillet ¾ filled with oil
  • Taco shell mold or use 2 forks to fold the taco after about 30 seconds
  • Taco holders

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 lb ground beef 85% lean works well
  • 2 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon oregano preferably Mexican
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • ½ can Ro-tel (tomatoes with chilis)
  • 1 cup beef broth
  • 12 corn tortillas
  • Vegetable oil for frying
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded, for garnish
  • 1 cup lettuce shredded, for garnish
  • 1 cup tomatoes diced and seeded, for garnish
  • Salsa for serving

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil over medium-high heat in a skillet.
    1 tablespoon olive oil
  • Cook the onion until soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic, and sauté for another 30 seconds.
    1 cup onion, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the beef and cook, stirring often, until no longer pink. Tilt the skillet and use a large spoon to remove most of the rendered grease. Discard safely.
    1 lb ground beef
  • Add all seasonings and the flour. Stir until well blended and aromatic, about 1 minute.
    2 teaspoon chili powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon oregano, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon cayenne, ½ teaspoon ground black pepper, 1 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • Add the Ro-tel and beef stock. Cook until thickened somewhat and most of the liquid has cooked down, about 10 minutes. The mixture should feel wet, but not runny, and also not dry.
    ½ can Ro-tel, 1 cup beef broth
  • Meanwhile, heat vegetable oil to 350°F degrees
    Vegetable oil
  • Fry corn tortillas in deep fryer, or in a skillet (if using a skillet…place the tortilla in the hot oil for about 10 seconds…then, using tongs and a fork, grab one end of the tortialla and gently fold in half….continue cooking for about 20 seconds…then flip, and cook for another 20 or 30 seconds, and until golden and nice and crisp).
    12 corn tortillas
  • Place cooked tortillas on paper towels. Preheat oven to 275°F.
  • Place meat mixture in tortilla shells and place on a baking sheet. Bake for 10 minutes. Remove from the oven and serve at once with all the fixings.
    1 cup cheddar cheese, 1 cup lettuce, 1 cup tomatoes, Salsa

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
Taco meat can be made several days in advance. Reheat with another ¼ cup of beef broth. The shells can be made 1 to 3 hours before serving. 
In the unlikely event that there are leftover tacos, wrap them lightly in foil. They will lose some of their crunch, but will still be delicious, even at room temperature.
The meat can be made and frozen for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Serving: 12 tacos | Calories: 333kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 565mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 705IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 172mg | Iron: 3mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in March 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in May 2023!

Tex-Mex Cheese Enchiladas

April 30, 2023 by Kris Longwell 7 Comments

An overhead view of a white 9 by 13 baking dish filled with cheese enchiladas in ancho sauce topped with shredded lettuce and pico de Gallo.

Tex-Mex is one of the most popular cuisines in the world, and now you make restaurant-quality enchiladas at home!

Growing up and living in Texas, we lived on Tex-Mex. We hardly ever met a taco or enchilada we didn’t like. Making a dish like this at home may seem intimidating, but if you start with the basics, namely a solid sauce, you won’t believe the results you will achieve. And it’s so much easier than you might think!

An overhead view of a white 9 by 13 baking dish filled with cheese enchiladas in ancho sauce topped with shredded lettuce and pico de Gallo.

Of course, it’s all about the sauce.

And the cheese and tortillas. And some onion. It all adds up to classic Tex-Mex.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Once you’ve made the ancho sauce (which can be made days in advance), the ingredient list is short and simple.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Ancho sauce – This is critical to making authentic enchiladas. It can be prepared up to a week in advance and can be frozen for a couple of months.
Corn tortillas – Store-bought is fine, but see if you have a Hispanic market nearby. They will most likely have homemade corn tortillas that are fresh and a little more sturdy.
Oil – Vegetable, for softening the tortillas.
Cheese – Get good quality cheese. We recommend a couple of blocks of cheddar and a block of Monterrey Jack. Shred them both. Pre-shredded is fine, but freshly shredded is even better.
Onions – Finely chopped. These are optional, but they are traditional for Tex-Mex cheese enchiladas.
Fixins’ – Chopped lettuce, pico de gallo, sour cream, and salsa are all great choices.

EXPERT TIP: To soften the tortillas, you’ll need to pass them quickly through hot oil. Don’t let them stay in the oil for more than about 3 seconds per side (a total of about 6 seconds). Drain them on paper towels and then coat them with the ancho sauce, allowing excess to drip off.

A person using a pair of metal tongs to turn a corn tortilla in a small skillet with hot oil and then coating that same tortilla in a bowl of enchilada sauce.

Tips For Perfect Tex-Mex Cheese Enchiladas

Make the Ancho Sauce – We just can’t emphasize this enough. Store-bought enchilada sauce is fine, but it will never give you that true Tex-Mex restaurant taste and texture that we all love so much. Seek out the ancho chiles and make the sauce. It makes all the difference.

Get Good Cheese – You’ll want to get a good melting cheese to make these enchiladas. For filling the enchiladas we use half cheddar and half Monterrey Jack and then we top the enchiladas with more cheddar. Pick up a couple of blocks of cheese and then shred them. Pre-shredded will work in a pinch, but you’ll get better results with freshly shredded.

Bake Seam-Side Down – As the cheese inside the enchiladas melts, they will flatten somewhat. This is normal. To make transferring from the dish to a plate a little easier, place them seam-side down. Using two spatulas helps in plating, as well. But don’t worry if they get a little jumbled when plating. The taste is what really matters.

A person sprinkling shredded cheddar cheese over the tops of rolled cheese enchiladas in ancho sauce.

How To Serve

As mentioned, transferring the baked enchiladas from the baking dish to the plate can be challenging. We recommend using a long spatula and carefully nestling it under a couple of enchiladas lengthwise. Then use another spatula to gently push the enchiladas off of the spatula onto the plate.

You could also use individual mini baking platters to heat the enchiladas. If your dinnerware is oven safe, you can form the enchiladas on the plate and then bake them until the cheese has melted, but be sure to warn your guests that the plates are hot (just like you are advised at most Tex-Mex restaurants!).

You’ll definitely want to include all the great toppings for enchiladas, including chopped green leaf lettuce, chopped tomatoes (or pico de gallo), sour cream, salsa, and if desired, homemade guacamole.

A partial and close-up view of a white baking dish filled with ancho enchiladas that are covered with melted cheese and topped with lettuce and pico de Gallo.

Other Classic Tex-Mex Recipes to Try

These enchiladas are about as classic Tex-Mex as you’ll get. But, while you’re at it, why not try some of these other classic dishes.

Tex-Mex Beef Tacos
Chicken Quesadillas
Chicken Tinga Tacos
Chicken Enchiladas with Verde Sauce
Classic Chili Rellenos with Cheese
Best-Ever Beef Tostada
Chicken Flautas
Shrimp Tacos Durados
Carnitas Tacos
Smothered Beef Burritos

But, in the meantime, aren’t these incredible cheese enchiladas calling your name?

Two cheese enchiladas being raised out of a baking dish with large cheese pull from dish to the spatula.

If you love Tex-Mex as much as we do, then you are absolutely going to love these enchiladas.

The homemade ancho sauce gives a depth of flavor that is authentic and unforgettable.

This has been a staple in our house for many years and after one bite, we think you and your family will begin the enchilada tradition, too!

Serve it with homemade Mexican rice and refried beans and you’ll have the best Tex-Mex platter in town!

A close-up view of a large white platter filled with Mexican rice on one side and refried beans on the other side and three cheese enchiladas with ancho sauce in the middle.

Ready to make the best enchiladas this side of San Antonio? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a large white platter filled with Mexican rice on one side and refried beans on the other side and three cheese enchiladas with ancho sauce in the middle.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Tex-Mex Cheese Enchiladas

These enchiladas are the real deal. Make the ancho chili sauce days in advance and go with quality freshly shredded cheese and you won't believe how wonderful of an enchilada you will be able to create. 
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Preparing the ancho sauce1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish
Cuisine: TexMex / Mexican
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 177kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9"x13" baking dish

Ingredients

  • 3 cups Ancho Chile Sauce
  • ¼ cup vegetable oil
  • 10 yellow corn tortillas
  • 3 cups cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 cups Monterrey Jack cheese shredded
  • ½ cup onion finely diced
  • green leaf lettuce chopped, for garnish
  • pico de gallo for garnish

Instructions

  • Make the ancho sauce ahead of time.
    3 cups Ancho Chile Sauce
  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Heat ancho sauce in sauce pan, or in microwave-safe bowl. Remove from heat and set aside. 
  • Spread about 1 cup of the ancho sauce across the bottom of the 9"13" dish.
  • Heat oil in a medium-sized, non-stick skillet. Place one tortilla into the oil for 3 seconds, quickly flip over for another 3 seconds, and then remove from the skillet and place on a plate lined with paper towels.
    ¼ cup vegetable oil, 10 yellow corn tortillas
  • Dip the softened tortilla in the ancho sauce and turn to fully coat. Lift the tortilla up and let excess drip off. Place in the baking dish and add ¼ cup of the cheddar and ¼ cup of the Monterrey Jack cheese in the middle of the tortilla.
    3 cups cheddar cheese, 2 cups Monterrey Jack cheese
  • Fold tortillas, so the edges cross on top. Turn the enchilada over in the dish so it is seam-side down. Continue with the remaining tortillas.
  • Add a layer of cheddar cheese across the top of the enchiladas. Sprinkle the chopped onions over the cheese.
    ½ cup onion
  • Bake for about 12 minutes until cheese is melted and bubbly.
  • Remove from oven and serve at once, garnishing with chopped lettuce and pico de gallo, if desired.
    green leaf lettuce, pico de gallo

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel.
Then ancho sauce can be made up to 5 days in advance. It can also be frozen for up to 2 months. 
You can also soften the tortillas by wrapping them in paper towels and damping them with a little tap water and then place them in the microwave on HIGH for about 1 minute. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for several days. Reheat until bubbly in a 350°F oven or in the microwave. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 278mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 425IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 302mg | Iron: 0.1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in January 2014, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in April 2023!

German Currywurst

April 26, 2023 by Kris Longwell Leave a Comment

A straight-on view of a basket lined with white parchment paper that is filled with a helping of German currywurst with a plastic white fork stuck in the side.

This dish is a staple at imbess food stands (“imbess” in German translates to “snack“) and has reached iconic status. Once you taste it, you’ll understand why.

It’s really quite a simple recipe, but there are several very important tips and ingredients that make this dish as authentic as possible. First and foremost is getting your hands on the right German sausage. We’ll talk more about that later. Preparing the sausage and the curry ketchup sauce is critical, too. When it all comes together, it is truly spectacular. Serving them homemade fries truly puts it over the top.

A straight-on view of a basket lined with white parchment paper that is filled with a helping of German currywurst with a plastic white fork stuck in the side.

How To Make German Currywurst

We’ve studied this recipe for quite some time, and we feel this is about as close to making currywurst outside of Berlin as authentic as you can.

The origins of the dish are humble, yet very interesting. Learn more here.

Seek out the very best ingredients, make the double-fried fries from scratch, and you and your guests will be very happy.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, to make this dish as authentic as possible, you need to get the right kind of German sausage. You’ll want a finely ground pork, or pork and veal sausage, preferably that is fully cooked. We order ours from an amazing German sausage company out of Illinois called Stiglmeier Sausage Company. Their Bavarian Bratwurst is heavenly and perfect for this dish.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

German sausage – We go with Bavarian bratwurst, but knackwurst (aka as knockwurst) and weisswurst (bockwurst with parsley) are both excellent choices.
Oil – Olive oil or vegetable
Onions – Chopped
Garlic – Minced
Curry powder – Making it from scratch is easier than you might think!
Ketchup – Or tomato sauce, but we find quality ketchup delivers the best consistency and flavor
Vinegar – White wine or apple cider are best
Brown sugar – We like dark, but light will work, too
Worcestershire sauce – For an added depth of flavor
Paprika – Smoked is excellent, but regular will work
Salt – Kosher
Mustard – Either dried (powder) or prepared yellow mustard
French fries – Or German bread (Brötchen)

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to get the skin of the sausages as crisp as possible without bursting the casings too much. We find grilling them until lightly browned work best. But, it is also traditional to quickly fry the links in a little vegetable oil. We tried this and the skins burst open. If frying, turn them frequently and keep the oil around 325°F.

A person using a large chef's knife to slice lightly grilled Bavarain bratwurst into bite-sized pieces on a small wooden cutting board.

Tips for Perfect German Currywurst

Get the Right Kind of Sausage – We can’t express this enough. Check with your local butcher. He/she very well may have a fine ground bratwurst available for you. If not, we strongly recommend ordering them from a reputable sausage maker. If you get sausage that is not pre-cooked, you’ll need to simmer it in lightly boiling water for about 20 minutes, or until fully cooked. Then either grill or pan-fry as directed.

Don’t Overcook the Sauce – You want to simmer the sauce just long enough until it starts to thicken. This generally only takes about 5 minutes once all of the ingredients have been added. You can reheat over medium-low heat, if necessary. if the sauce is too thick, and almost like a paste, thin it with a little water.

Go Easy on the Curry Powder – Yellow curry powder is a prominent flavor and can quickly overpower the taste of the dish. Two tablespoons give it that distinctive currywurst taste and then just a very light dusting just before serving is perfect.

EXPERT TIP: We like our curry tomato sauce to be fairly smooth. So, we use an immersion blender to purée most of the cooked onions and garlic. It’s not 100% necessary and even when we use our immersion blender, we still leave a little bit of the chunkiness from the onions. You could even omit the onions and garlic completely, but we really like the flavor they provide.

A person using an immersion blender to purée a curry tomato sauce in a silver saucepan.

How To Serve

In Berlin, it is customary to toss the sliced sausage in the sauce until coated and then serve it in a basket (usually paper) with either fries or German bread rolls (Brötchen).

We love the homemade fries because they really soak up the amazing sauce. In Germany, the fries are often served with mayonnaise mixed with curry powder and lemon juice or frites sauce. It’s delicious, but again, the sauce from the currywurst is amazing on its own.

EXPERT TIP: The fries can be made about an hour in advance. We heat them up in a 275°F oven on a baking sheet lined with a silicon mat or parchment paper. They will lose some of their crispiness, but will still be good. For crispy fries, try and coordinate the currywurst being ready around the same time the fries are finished. This takes a little planning but is very doable.

An overhead view of a small food basket filled with a layer of French fries that are topped with sliced German sausage in a currywurst sauce.

Other Classic German Recipes To Try

We just love German food, and here are some of our favorites that we think you’ll love, too!

German Schnitzel with Mushroom (Jaeger) Sauce
Ale-Braised Bratwurst and Sauerkraut
Classic Spaetzle and Cheese
German Soft Pretzels
Bratwurst Sliders with Beer Cheese Sauce

But in the meantime, isn’t this Berliner Currywurst calling your name?

A close-up view of Germany currywurst sitting on homemade French fries in a basket lined with parchment paper.

There are many variations of this dish in Berlin and across Germany. We think this version is simply amazing. We’re not German, but we’ve learned from a lot of amazing German cooks and historians.

To make it as authentic as possible, you’ll need to seek out a solid German bratwurst (pre-cooked, finely ground is optimal).

And it all comes together in a matter of minutes. Homemade fries are awesome, but store-bought will work, too.

A white plastic fork holding up a bite-sized piece of cooked Bavarian bratwurst as well as a couple of French fries with a coating of curry tomato sauce on it.

Ready to make the best Berlin street food this side of, well…Berlin? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a basket lined with white parchment paper that is filled with a helping of German currywurst with a plastic white fork stuck in the side.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

German Currywurst

This iconic street food originated in Berlin and is wildly popular across Germany. Seek out finely ground pork German bratwurst (preferably pre-cooked) for the most authentic taste and texture. The curry ketchup can be made up to several days in advance.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Time to Prepare the French Fries45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer or Entree
Cuisine: German
Servings: 4
Calories: 462kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas, electric, or charcoal grill or skillet for frying

Ingredients

  • 4 Bavarian bratwurst finely ground, preferably pre-cooked
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup ketchup
  • 2 tablespoon yellow curry plus extra for dusting
  • ¼ cup white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon dried mustard
  • French fries

Instructions

  • Turn your grill to medium-hot. Place the brats over direct heat and turn them frequently. Cook until lightly browned all over. Remove from grill.
    4 Bavarian bratwurst
  • Meanwhile, in a medium-sized saucepan, heat the olive oil over medium heat. Add the onions and sauté them until they are softened, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 cup onion
  • Add the garlic and sauté until soft and aromatic, about 30 seconds longer.
    2 cloves garlic
  • Stir in the ketchup and bring to a slight simmer.
    1 cup ketchup
  • Add the curry powder, white wine vinegar, brown sugar, Worcestershire sauce, paprika, salt, and mustard. Let simmer for about 5 minutes, the sauce should thicken slightly. Remove from heat, and if desired, purée the sauce with an immersion blender.
    2 tablespoon yellow curry, ¼ cup white wine vinegar, ½ cup brown sugar, 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce, 2 teaspoon smoked paprika, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon dried mustard
  • Slice each bratwurst into 6 to 8 bite-size pieces. Stir the cut bratwurst into the curry ketchup.
  • Place the french fries in a small basket or bowl (lined with parchment paper, if desired), and then spoon about 1 cup of the currywurst over the fries. Dust with a small amount of curry powder. Serve at once.
    French fries

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Finding the right sausage is critical in achieving authentic currywurst. We purchase ours from Stiglmeier and they are simply incredible. Check with your local butcher, chances are he/she will carry it. Remember, finely ground and pre-cooked is best. 
You can make the French fries ahead of time (but not too many hours in advance). Keep them warm in a 275°F oven. 
The curry ketchup sauce can be made several days in advance. Reheat over medium heat until simmering. If the sauce is too thick (it should be slightly thicker than ketchup), thin it with a little water. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 1042mg | Potassium: 323mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 1985IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg

NOTE: The development of the recipe required extensive research and testing. It is mostly adapted from The German Cookbook by Alfons Schuhbeck. 

Banh Mi Sandwich

April 23, 2023 by Kris Longwell 6 Comments

An overhead view of two fully stuffed banh mi sandwiches sitting on a cutting board with sliced cha lua, peppers, and mayonnaise nearby.

We love sandwiches of all kinds, but this one is absolutely one of our favorites.

The history of the Banh Mi is fascinating and explains the French and Vietnamese influences that come together to make this incredible sandwich. Make almost all of the components of the sandwich a day or two in advance, and then the assembly is a snap when you’re ready to serve!

An overhead view of two fully stuffed banh mi sandwiches sitting on a cutting board with sliced cha lua, peppers, and mayonnaise nearby.

How to Make a Banh Mi Sandwich

This sandwich has become a global favorite sandwich and when you make it for yourself (and hungry guests), you’ll understand why it’s so popular.

There are plenty of variations for the key components of the sandwich, but we’re going to give you the elements that we think bring together the best banh mi sandwich outside of Vietnam.

The Ingredients You Will Need

You may need to schedule a trip to your local Asian market to pick up some specific ingredients. Or, you can order them online. The hardest ingredient to find is most likely the Vietnamese baguette. See below for alternatives.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Cha Lua – Vietnamese ham. This can be prepared several days in advance
Vinegar – White vinegar, rice wine vinegar, or white wine vinegar all work.
Sugar – Granulated.
Carrots – Julienned, or cut into match strips.
Daikon – A radish found in well-stocked produce sections or at an Asian market. Julienned.
Soy sauce – Low sodium, if desired.
Sesame oil – Found in the Asian section of most supermarkets, or at an Asian market.
Sriracha sauce – Could substitute chili sauce, all found in the condiments section of most supermarkets.
Onion powder
Garlic powder
Black pepper – Freshly ground
Vietnamese baguettes – Not French, it’s too dense. Seek out a Vietnamese market. If you can’t find them, go with a hoagie (or submarine) soft bun/bread.
Paté – Pork is traditional.
Mayonnaise – We love Kewpie, but any variety will work.
Pork cold cuts – Genoa salami is a great choice.
Cilantro – Cut into sprigs.
English cucumber – Sliced lengthwise very thinly.
Condiments – Maggi seasoning is very traditional and can be found in Asian markets. Chili oil is also delicious.
Peppers – Pickled jalapeños are our favorite.

EXPERT TIP: The cha lua can be made up to 3 days in advance. Slice the ham into approximately ¼-inch slices.

A person using a Japanese-style knife to cut a slice of cooked cha lua on a cutting board.

Tips for a Perfect Banh Mi Sandwich

Make the Cha Lua – The most involved part of this recipe is making the cha lua (Vietnamese pork loaf), but it really is so authentic, and delicious, and gives the sandwich the most authentic taste. Make it several days in advance! It’s fun and really amazing.

Don’t Skimp on the Paté – The paté adds a distinctive depth of flavor but is not overpowering. Be liberal when smearing it onto the bottom bun. Then add a nice layer of mayonnaise on top of it. It’s incredible how the flavors meld.

Use Soft Bread – Do your best to seek out a Vietnamese market to find the baguette. If you don’t have access to one, then use a soft hoagie or subway bun. If you know of an eatery that serves banh mi sandwiches, give them a call and see if they will sell you the buns, often times they will!

EXPERT TIP: Use a mandolin or a sharp knife to cut the carrots and daikon radish into 1-inch strips. Soaking them in hot vinegar water will pickle them in about 30 minutes. Drain before building the sandwich.

A close-up view of a white bowl filled with julienned carrots and a daikon radish that is soaking in pickling juice.

Pork Is Traditional in a Banh Mi

We’re using three types of pork for our version of the sandwich.

Of course, the cha lua is a classic Vietnamese ham loaf. And we’ll also add a layer of pork cold cuts. In Vietnam, you’ll see your sandwich filled with lots of classic pork cold cuts that aren’t readily available in North America or Europe. Substituting your favorite accessible cold cuts is perfectly fine. We love using Genoa salami.

We also love cooking up an amazing Asian-seasoned ground pork mixture. Probably not as traditional, but we absolutely love it and think you will, too.

A close-up view of ground pork that has been cooked and seasoned with Asian spices in a steel skillet with a wooden spatula in it.

How To Serve

The classic banh mi sandwich is by nature going to be a bit messy to eat.

Carefully layer all of the components into the split-open bread, and then use a large knife to press the innards down as you bring the top bun over it all.

One full sandwich is filling but is ideal for 1 serving (to a hungry guest). This recipe will comfortably make 4 to 6 sandwiches.

A close-up view of a banh mi sandwich stuffed with cilantro, cold cuts, sliced pork rolls, and vegetables.

This sandwich is one of the most epic sandwiches in the world.

It’s fun to make and always a huge hit when serving guests.

Make the cha lua, seasoned pork, and even the pickled vegetables in advance, and assembly happens in a matter of minutes. Amazing!

A person holding a banh mi sandwich that has been sliced in half so the components of the sandwich are visible including pork, vegetables, and herbs.

Ready to make one of the most iconic and epic sandwiches of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag @HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of two side-by-side banh mi sandwiches that are stuffed with cilantro, cold cuts, sliced pork roll, carrots, daikon, and pickled jalapeños.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Banh Mi Sandwich

This Banh Mi sandwich is so loaded with flavor, it's unreal. Drawing from French and Vietnamese influences, this is one of our favorite sammys. Make the cha lua ahead of time...it's fun, and so worth it! The flavors complement each other perfectly here. Enjoy!
Prep Time45 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Steaming and resting the cha lua1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
Course: Sandwich
Cuisine: Vietnamese / French
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 454kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • steamer for the cha lua

Ingredients

Do Ahead

  • 1 loaf cha lua (Vietnamese Ham) link to recipe in instructions

For the Pickled Vegetables

  • ⅓ cup white vinegar
  • ⅓ cup sugar
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt to taste
  • ½ cup carrots julienned
  • ½ cup daikon radish julienned

For the Seasoned Pork

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 1 lb pork ground
  • 2 teaspoon hoisin sauce
  • 2 teaspoon soy sauce
  • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
  • 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce
  • 1 teaspoon Chinese five-spice powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For the Sandwich

  • 4 Vietnamese baguettes or hoagie buns, split open
  • 4.5 oz pork paté
  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 cup cilantro sprigs
  • 1 English cucumber cut lengthwise into thin slices
  • 12 ¼-inch slices cha lua or bologna
  • 12 slices salami
  • 1 cup pickled jalapeños
  • 4 teaspoon Maggi seasoning or soy sauce
  • chile oil optional

Instructions

  • Make the Cha Lua (can be made up to 2 to 3 days in advance)
    1 loaf cha lua (Vietnamese Ham)

Pickle the Carrots and Daikon

  • Bring the vinegar, sugar, salt, and ½ cup water to a boil in a medium saucepan over high heat.
    ⅓ cup white vinegar, ⅓ cup sugar, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Place the julienned carrots and daikon in a medium-sized heatproof bowl. Pour the vinegar mixture over the vegetables. Set aside for at least 30 minutes, then drain.
    ½ cup carrots, ½ cup daikon radish

Make the Seasoned Pork

  • Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add onion and sauté until soft, about 4 minutes.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 cup onion
  • Add the ground pork and cook until no longer pink. Spoon off excess grease, if desired.
    1 lb pork
  • Stir in the hoisin, soy sauce, sesame oil, sriracha, five-spice powder, onion and garlic powders, and pepper. Cook, stirring often, for another 5 minutes. Remove from the heat and set aside.
    2 teaspoon hoisin sauce, 2 teaspoon soy sauce, 1 teaspoon sesame oil, 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce, 1 teaspoon Chinese five-spice powder, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon black pepper

Assemble the Sandwich

  • Liberally smear the pork paté over the inside bottom bun. Add a layer of mayonnaise over the paté.
    4 Vietnamese baguettes, 4.5 oz pork paté, ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • Layer the banh mi components in the following order:
  • Cilantro, cucumber, carrots, daikon, seasoned pork, sliced cha lua, salami, a drizzle of Maggi (or soy), pickled jalapenos, and a drizzle of chili oil, if using.
    1 cup cilantro sprigs, 1 English cucumber, 12 ¼-inch slices cha lua, 12 slices salami, 1 cup pickled jalapeños, 4 teaspoon Maggi seasoning, chile oil
  • Add the top portion of each baguette.  Cut in half, if desired, and serve.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The cha lua can be prepared up to 3 days in advance.  Thick slices of bologna can be substituted. Ask your local deli (or deli at the supermarket) to slice ¼-inch slices for you. 
The seasoned pork and pickled vegetables can be made up to a day in advance. 
If you can't find Vietnamese baguettes (soft French baguettes), then use soft hoagie or subway buns. Don't use a regular baguette or Italian loaf, they're too tough. 
Leftover sandwiches can be wrapped in plastic wrap and stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. Let come to room temperature before serving. 

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 998mg | Potassium: 528mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 2236IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in August 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography, and a fabulous new video in April 2023!

Easy Homemade Soft Pretzels

April 20, 2023 by Kris Longwell 4 Comments

A straight-on view of a black platter filled with a stack of homemade soft pretzels next to two glasses of beer and a bowl of melted cheese.

These are the quintessential snacks. Fluffy on the inside and salty, crispy on the exterior. Just the best.

If you’re looking for the perfect appetizer for the big game, party, or just a fun weekend afternoon, this is the recipe for you. Even the pickiest of eaters love these gems. Be sure to have a side of homemade beer cheese, or even just mustard or nacho cheese sauce for dipping. Always a huge hit. And so easy to make!

A straight-on view of a black platter filled with a stack of homemade soft pretzels next to two glasses of beer and a bowl of melted cheese.

How To Make Homemade Soft Pretzels

You may think making delicious pretzels from scratch is too difficult to try at home.

We’re here to tell you to rethink that notion. We’ve got the tips to make the most yummy, chewy soft pretzels in the world!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There are just a handful of ingredients required to make this national treasure of a snack, but the way you bring them all together is critical in achieving the classic pretzel taste and texture.

Here’s what you need to have on hand

Water – Warm (around 105°F is perfect)
Yeast – Instant (aka Rapid Rise) or Active Dry
Barley Malt Syrup – Can also use dark corn syrup or dark brown sugar
Salt – Kosher
Butter – Melted and slightly cooled
Flour – All-purpose
Baking soda – See NOTES regarding this
Salt – Coarse sea salt or pretzel salt

EXPERT TIP: To form the pretzel, first divide the dough into twelve pieces. Use your hands to roll each piece of dough into about a 20-inch rope. Lift the two ends up, twist them, and fold them over to attach the opposite end. Use your fingers to shape the dough into a pretzel shape. See the images below for reference.

A person holding up two ends of a rope of pretzel dough and then that person twisting the ends together and then finally the person forming the dough into a pretzel.

Tips for Perfect Homemade Soft Pretzels

Check Your Yeast – You can use Instant Yeast (aka Rapid Rise) or Active Dry. But the yeast must still be active. If after 8 to 10 minutes with the warm water and barley malt syrup, and the yeast isn’t foaming, you’ll need to discard it and get new yeast. The water should be warm, but not too hot. 105° to 115°F is perfect.

Knead the Dough Properly – Have plenty of flour on hand. The dough will be sticky at first, but as you continue to knead, it will become pliable, elastic, and no longer sticky. It’s a little bit of a workout, but you’ll need to knead the dough for 6 to 8 minutes.

Watch the Bake Time – Most ovens vary from oven to oven. Also, there are usually hot spots inside an oven. You’ll want to bake the pretzels until they are a deep golden color and beginning to split on the tops. This usually takes about 15 minutes, but it might be less or more, depending on your oven. Typically, you’ll need two baking sheets, preferably lined with silicon mats. Switch them around after about 10 minutes of baking.

EXPERT TIP: Once the pretzels have been formed, you’ll need to get a pot of 8 cups of water boiling. Carefully mix in the baking soda and stir until dissolved. After placing the uncooked pretzels in the boiling soda water, you’ll only want to boil them for 25 to 30 seconds. Don’t leave them in any longer, or they will have a bitter taste to them.

Two uncooked pretzels in an oval Dutch oven filled with boiling water on a stovetop.

How To Serve and Store

Your guests will truly be impressed when you bring out a platter of these incredible pretzels.

They are really delicious served warm, but they are also fantastic served at room temperature.

You’ll definitely want some sort of dipping sauce to accompany them. We love our homemade beer cheese sauce, but yellow mustard, grainy mustard, or nacho cheese sauce are all great options, too. Or, a combination of all of them!

In the unlikely event that you have leftover soft pretzels, you can store them in a large freezer baggie on the counter for up to 5 days. They freeze beautifully, too!

A close-up view of freshly baked soft pretzels sprinkled with coarse salt stacked on top of each other on a black circular platter.

Other Party Appetizer Recipes to Try

We love serving these pretzels for family gatherings, parties, and watching the big game. They are always a huge hit. Here are some other favorite party foods that folks flip for.

Loaded Potato Skins
Classic Buffalo Wings
Fried Pickles with Homemade Ranch
Sheet Pan Nachos
Fried Mozzarella with Fresh Marinara Sauce
Tex-Mex Queso
Best-Ever Guacamole

These are all so good. But, aren’t you craving this classic snack? The best!

A person holding a freshly baked soft pretzel that has been split open so the inside of the pretzel is visible.

There is just something extra-special about freshly baked homemade pretzels.

Once you make them, you’ll never want to purchase the store-bought variety again.

This recipe gives you that classic chewy interior with a slightly crunchy exterior with a touch of salt. Insanely good!

A person raising a portion of a pretzel that has been dipped into a bowl of cheese sauce.

Ready to make the most delicious baked appetizer in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a circular black platter filled with a stack of homemade soft pretzels.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Homemade Soft Pretzels

Homemade Soft Pretzels are seriously about as good as they get. It may seem intimidating, but if you follow this recipe closely, you will be amazed at how delicious and authentic they turn out.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Kneading and Resting25 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Appertizer
Cuisine: American / German
Servings: 12
Calories: 176kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Silicone mats or parchment paper with cooking spray

Ingredients

  • 1½ cups warm water 105° to 115°F
  • 2¼ teaspoon instant yeast or ative dry, 1 package
  • 2 tablespoon barley malt syrup or dark corn syrup
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter melted and slightly cooled
  • 4 cups all-purpose flour
  • 8 cups water
  • ½ cup baking soda
  • coarse sea salt for sprinkling

Instructions

  • In a large bowl, mix together the warm water, yeast, and malt barley syrup. Let rest for 8 to 10 minutes, until foamy.
    1½ cups warm water, 2¼ teaspoon instant yeast, 2 tablespoon barley malt syrup
  • Whisk in the salt and melted butter.
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Working 1 cup at a time, use a wooden spoon to mix the flour. Keep working the flour into the wet mixture until a dough just starts to form. You may not use all 4 cups of the flour.
    4 cups all-purpose flour
  • Turn the dough onto a floured surface and knead the dough with your hands for 6 minutes, adding more flour if the dough becomes wet to the touch.
  • Cover the dough with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 10 minutes.
  • Cut the dough into 12 equal portions. Roll one piece of dough into roughly a 20-inch rope. Lift the two ends of the rope and twist them together about halfway down. Attach the two ends of the rope to the circular end of the pretzel dough (see the photos in the blog post or the video for visual reference).
  • Meanwhile, bring the water to a boil in a large pot over high heat. Carefully mix in the baking soda and stir until dissolved.
    ½ cup baking soda, 8 cups water
  • Working in batches, carefully lower the pretzels into the boiling soda water and cook for no more than 25 to 30 seconds. Use a slotted spatula to remove the pretzels from the water. Briefly let the water drip off the pretzels.
  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Place the partially cooked pretzels on baking sheets that have been lined with silicone mats or parchment paper sprayed with cooking spray. Sprinkle the pretzels with the coarse salt.
    coarse sea salt
  • Bake the pretzels for 15 minutes, or until deeply golden. Switch the baking sheets and turn them around after about 10 minutes of baking.
  • Remove from the oven and transfer the pretzels to a baking rack. Let them rest for at least 10 minutes.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Barley malt syrup is hard to find, but can easily be ordered online. It really contributes to the authentic pretzel taste. If you can't get your hands on it, dark corn syrup or even dark brown sugar will work, in a pinch. 
You can prepare the pretzels all the way up to boiling them up to 12 hours before baking them. Cover them tightly and keep them refrigerated until 1 hour before baking. Let them rest on the counter to lose their chill. Uncover and bake as instructed.  
Leftover pretzels will keep for up to 1 week and can be frozen for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 1475mg | Potassium: 67mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 58IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 2mg

Spinach Linguine with Wild Mushroom Sauce

April 16, 2023 by Kris Longwell 1 Comment

An overhead view of a large white platter filled with spinach pasta and wild mushroom sauce with two serving spoons inserted on the sides.

There are some dishes that are just extra special. This one is undoubtedly one of them.

If you’re needing a dish that is sure to impress, you should consider this one. It takes some time, especially if you make homemade spinach pasta and chicken stock. But when you and your guests take that first bite, you’ll experience a pasta dish like none other. Use vegetable broth, if desired, to keep the dish 100% vegetarian!

An overhead view of a large white platter filled with spinach pasta and wild mushroom sauce with two serving spoons inserted on the sides.

How To Make Spinach Linguine with Wild Mushroom Sauce

When making this dish, you’ll need to plan in advance.

Review all of the ingredients and see if you need to order any of them, or seek them out. Also, make sure you have what you need to make the fresh pasta, if you decide to make it (which you should!).

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned previously, you may need to seek a few of the ingredients in this list. Anything you can’t find at your local supermarket can easily (and quickly) be delivered to you (if in North America).

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Porcini mushrooms – Dried
Wild mushrooms – Get a variety! Shiitake, baby bella, portobello, oyster, and cremini are all great!
Chicken stock – Can use vegetable broth/stock to keep the dish 100% vegetarian
Herbs – Fresh is best: bay leaves, thyme, basil, oregano, Italian parsley
Oil – Olive oil
Garlic – Thinly sliced
Salt and pepper – For seasoning
Whole tomatoes – Canned San Marzano are excellent!
Spinach Pasta – Fresh is best. Homemade is even better. 
Butter – Unsalted
Parmesan cheese – Grated, use a block and a grater for finishing plated bowls, if desired
White truffle oil – Optional, but so good. Just remember, a little goes a long way!

EXPERT TIP: Sauté the mushrooms until they are just softened, about 5 minutes. They will continue to cook as they simmer in the sauce.

Sautéed sliced wild mushrooms are being transferred from a white bowl into a skillet filled with a simmering broth and tomato sauce.

Tips for Perfect Spinach Linguine with Wild Mushroom Sauce

Soak the Dried Porcinis – Soaking the dried porcinis in warm water for 20 minutes is critical. It not only reconstitutes the mushrooms it creates a deeply flavorful broth that you’ll use in the dish. Sometimes the porcini mushrooms can have a little dirt on them. Look closely after you’ve soaked them. If you see a little grit, just use a paper towel to clean them and dry them. Be sure to strain the liquid through a sieve.

Don’t Overcook the Pasta – When making the pasta, don’t roll it out too thin. Roll it to no more than the third or fourth setting. Then, only cook it for 3 minutes and then drain immediately. If not using the pasta right away, you can toss it with a little olive oil.

Go Easy on the Truffle Oil – The white truffle oil truly takes this dish to an amazing level. But be careful, a little goes a long way. We pour half of the sauce over the pasta, then add 2 tablespoon of truffle oil, toss it all together, and then top with the remaining sauce. You may try only 1 tablespoon of the truffle oil, taste, and add more if desired.

EXPERT TIP: Once the pasta has cooked (typically only 3 minutes is needed for fresh), drain completely, and then add to your pasta bowl. Toss with the butter and Parmesan cheese. Be gentle. Don’t let the pasta sit for too long before adding the sauce.

A large wooden spoons lifting up cooked fresh spinach pasta from a bowl.

How To Serve

This dish is truly as gorgeous in appearance as it is scrumptious in taste.

It is stunning when brought to the table in a large pasta bowl. We love to let folks serve themselves. We leave some of the sauce on the side so guests can top their serving with more, if they wish.

For a nice touch, pick up a block of Parmesan cheese, and then use a zester or microplane to grate fresh cheese over each plated dish.

This dish is robust but still has a light feel to it. Therefore, a nice red wine or white wine pairs beautifully. We love a crisp Chardonnay or full-bodied Cabernet.

A person grating a block of Parmesan cheese over a pasta bowl filled with spinach linguine with sautéed wild mushrooms and tomatoes.

Other Amazing Pasta Recipes to Try

If you love pasta as much as we do, you’re going to love these classic recipes to make in your very own kitchen! Use fresh or dried pasta, it’s up to you!

Rustic Bolognese Lasagna
Classic Baked Ziti
Pappardelle with Seasonal Vegetables
Spinach Fettuccine with Creamy Sausage Sauce
Spaghetti and Meatballs
Shrimp Fettuccine Alfredo
Spaghetti Vongole (White Clam Sauce)
Easy Ravioli with Tomato Basil Sauce
Pasta alla Norma
Tonnarelli Cacio e Pepe (Pasta with Black Pepper Cream Sauce)

In the meantime, aren’t you craving this? It’s off-the-charts delicious!

A person grating a block of Parmesan cheese over a pasta bowl filled with spinach linguine with sautéed wild mushrooms and tomatoes.

We love all kinds of Italian dishes and we can honestly say this is one of the best we have ever made, served, and eaten.

There is an elevated taste and texture to it. When you make it, you and your guests will instantly know it’s something special.

To take it to the highest in culinary excellence, go ahead and make the pasta and the stock from scratch. And don’t forget the white truffle oil. It all comes together for one of the best pasta dishes ever.

Every bite is an Italian taste sensation.

A fork holding up a helping of spinach pasta with wild mushroom sauce.

Ready to make the best pasta dish this side of Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of an individual white pasta bowl filled with spinach pasta with wild mushroom sauce.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Spinach Linguine with Wild Mushroom Sauce

This dish is a fun project with stunning results. If you make the pasta from scratch, and even the chicken stock, it is a true show-stopper. But, even if you don't, the sauce is so incredibly flavorful, and you'll still have a dish that guests will be talking about for some time.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Spinach Preparation1 hour hr
Total Time2 hours hrs
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 4
Calories: 375kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 8 oz fresh spinach linguine click link for full recipe
  • 1 oz dried porcini mushrooms
  • 2 cups warm water
  • 1 lb wild mushrooms fresh, such as cremini, shiitake, portobello, oyster, trumpet
  • 2½ cups chicken broth or vegetable
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 2 sprigs thyme fresh
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic thinly sliced
  • ¼ cup basil fresh, chopped
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh, chopped
  • 1 tablespoon oregano fresh, chopped
  • Salt and pepper
  • 1 cup whole tomatoes drained, San Marzanos are great
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter cubed
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated, divided
  • 2 tablespoon white truffle oil optional, see NOTES

Instructions

Do Ahead (But Not Too Far Ahead)

  • Prepare the fresh linguine. Place on parchment paper on a baking sheet sprinkled liberally with semolina flour (or cornmeal) and covered with a kitchen towel.
    8 oz fresh spinach linguine

Prepare the Sauce

  • In a medium-sized bowl, add the dried porcini mushrooms and cover with the warm water. Let soak for 20 minutes.
    1 oz dried porcini mushrooms, 2 cups warm water
  • Wipe the fresh mushrooms clean with a damp paper towel. Remove the stems and set them aside (hold on to the stems). Slice the mushrooms to about ¼-inch thickness and set aside.
    1 lb wild mushrooms
  • Use a sieve to drain the soaked porcinis into another medium-sized bowl. If the mushrooms have a little grit on them, use a clean paper towel to wipe them clean. Give them a rough chop and set aside. Hold onto the soaking liquid.
  • Add the chicken broth, reserved mushroom stems, bay leaf, and thyme to a medium-sized saucepan over medium heat and bring to a simmer. Add half of the soaked porcinis to the pan. Simmer for 15 minutes and then raise the heat to high and boil for another 5 minutes.
    2½ cups chicken broth, 1 bay leaf, 2 sprigs thyme
  • Strain the broth through a sieve into a heat-proof bowl. Discard the solids and hold onto the broth.
  • In a large saucepan/skillet, heat the oil over medium heat. Once shimmering, add the garlic, and sauté, stirring often, until lightly golden and aromatic, about 1 to 2 minutes.
    ½ cup olive oil, 2 cloves garlic
  • Add the basil, parsley, oregano, remaining porcinis, and sliced fresh mushrooms. Sauté, stirring often, until the mushrooms are tender when pierced with a knife, about 8 minutes. Add a healthy pinch of salt and pepper and stir to coat.
    ¼ cup basil, 2 tablespoon Italian parsley, 1 tablespoon oregano, Salt and pepper
  • Meanwhile, bring a large pot of salted water to a boil.
  • Add the reserved chicken mushroom broth and ½ cup of the porcini soaking liquid to the mushroom mixture. Use your hands to break up the tomatoes into the pan. Season with 1 teaspoon salt and ½ teaspoon black pepper. Bring to a simmer and cook for 10 to 15 minutes, until the sauce thickens a little.
    1 cup whole tomatoes
  • Cook the pasta (if fresh, usually only about 3 minutes). Drain the pasta and then add to a large pasta bowl. Toss the hot pasta with the butter and ¼ cup of the grated Parmesan cheese.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter, ½ cup Parmesan cheese
  • Transfer half of the sauce over the pasta. Drizzle on the truffle oil (if using), and toss it all together. Add more sauce on top (reserving about 2 cups for passing tableside). Top with more grated cheese and pass the rest at the table. Serve at once.
    2 tablespoon white truffle oil

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Fresh pasta works wonderfully with this sauce. Homemade is amazing, but you can usually find packaged fresh pasta in the refrigerated section of many well-stocked supermarkets. Buitoni carries excellent varieties of fresh pasta. 
See the notes in the Spinach Pasta recipe post regarding storing and drying homemade pasta. 
The white truffle oil is amazing in this dish, but a little goes a long way. Don't be heavy-handed with it. Try 1 tbsp, toss it all together, take a taste, and then see if you want another tbsp. We like 2 tablespoon for the entire dish and we toss it with the pasta and half of the sauce, and then add the remaining sauce on top. 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. We don't recommend freezing this dish. 

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 190mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 572IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 187mg | Iron: 1mg

Homemade Spinach Pasta

April 16, 2023 by Kris Longwell 1 Comment

A large wooden spoons lifting up cooked fresh spinach pasta from a bowl.

Dried pasta is great, it really is. But, there is something transcendent about freshly homemade.

Homemade egg pasta is absolutely delicious and we love cooking with it. But the addition of spinach not only adds a beautiful color, the taste is incredible. Follow this foolproof recipe and you will discover the joy of making pasta from scratch.

A large wooden spoons lifting up cooked fresh spinach pasta from a bowl.

How to Make Homemade Spinach Pasta

Making spinach pasta from scratch may seem intimidating, but it’s actually much easier than you might think.

You just need the right tools and ingredients. We’ll show you the steps to make unforgettable pasta.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients and Tools You Will Need

There are not a lot of ingredients to make fresh pasta, but getting the right amount of moisture to dry ratio correct is key.

You can also do all this by hand, but the following tools make the process so much easier and will help you produce pristine pasta every single time.

The Ingredients

Spinach – We recommend using mature fresh spinach (not baby). However, baby spinach will work, too. Frozen will work in an absolute pinch.
Eggs – Room temperature is best
Oil – Quality olive oil is best
Salt – Kosher, if possible
Flour – We highly recommend a combination of semolina and all-purpose.

The Tools

9 to 12-cup food processor – It brings the dough together easily
KitchenAid Stand Mixer with Pasta Attachment – This tool is designed so the pasta won’t stick the rollers

EXPERT TIP: The dough will be very sticky at first. When you lift the dough out of the food processor, be sure your hands are liberally floured. If the dough is too sticky and won’t form a ball, place it back in the food processor and add several tablespoons of flour, and pulse until a ball forms.

A person's hands hovering around a ball of spinach pasta sitting on a floured black marble countertop.

Tips for Perfect Homemade Spinach Pasta

Squeeze Out Excess Water – After blanching the fresh spinach in boiling water for a couple of minutes, you’ll want to immediately drain the spinach. Use a wooden spoon to press as much of the liquid out of the spinach as possible. Once cool enough to handle, use your hands to wring the spinach. Then, give the spinach a rough chop.

Use Semolina Flour, if Possible – Semolina is milled durum wheat flour that is ideal for making pasta. We recommend using a combination of all-purpose and semolina flour. It can be found in the baking section or the ‘specialty products’ area of many well-stocked supermarkets. If you can’t find it, you can easily order it online. In a pinch, use just all-purpose.

Keep the Pasta Moist and Separated – After you’ve rolled out the pasta, and especially if you’ve cut it, it’s important to keep the pasta covered with a kitchen towel and to sprinkle semolina (or cornmeal) all over the uncooked pasta. This keeps the pasta from drying out and from sticking to each other. Don’t worry, the semolina will fall off the pasta once you cook it.

EXPERT TIP: As you work the dough, especially before you run it through the pasta press, it’s important to maintain the right level of moisture, but not too much. Work on a floured surface and keep your hands nicely floured. As you roll out the dough throughout the process, keep an eye on it. If it’s overly moist, sprinkle more flour on it and rub it in. We pasta can have the tendency to stick to the pasta roller, and won’t cook properly.

A person using a ceramic rolling pin to flatten spinach pasta and then that person folding over the ends of the pasta sheet.

Storing

Fresh pasta is best when served and consumed soon after it’s made. However, you can absolutely store it for days, if done properly.

Serving Next Day

If you plan on serving the pasta the next day, simply toss the fresh pasta in a little flour and curl them into circular clusters. Place in a container with a tight-fitting lid and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours.

Freezing for Future Use

You can easily freeze fresh pasta. If you want to freeze a ball of pasta dough, simply tightly wrap it in plastic wrap and place it in a freezer baggie and then freeze it for up to 1 month. You can also freeze pasta noodles by tossing them in flour and then allowing the pasta to air dry for 1 hour. Then place in a freezer bag and freeze for up to 8 months.

A person passing a sheet of fresh spinach pasta through a pasta attachment on a stand mixer.

How To Dry Fresh Pasta

If you don’t plan on cooking your fresh pasta within an hour or two of rolling the dough out, you will need to dry it. It’s easy to do.

First, sprinkle flour (semolina or all-purpose) all over the pasta (cut or sheets). Then lay it on a baking sheet, preferably lined with parchment or wax paper, or on a pasta rack. Keep the pasta out of direct sunlight and allow the pasta to rest for 24 hours, or until the pasta is completely dried. You will know it is dried when it easily snaps.

Place the dried pasta in a baggie or container with a lid. It will stay in your pantry for up to 6 to 7 months. Cook in salted boiling water until tender and al denté, usually about 8 to 10 minutes.

A person sprinkling semolina flour over strips of fresh spinach linguine on parchment paper on a baking pan.

Pasta Dishes to Try with Fresh Pasta

We use quality dried pasta often when making dishes such as baked ziti, spaghetti and meatballs, or country pasta. However, here are some pasta dishes that are perfectly suited for homemade fresh pasta:

Pappadelle with Seasonal Vegetables
Creamy Sausage with Fresh Fettuccini
Rustic Lasagna
Fresh Spinach Pasta with Wild Mushroom Sauce
Spaghetti Vongole (White Clam Sauce)
Shrimp Scampi with Fresh Linguine

A person holding up homemade spinach pasta that has been cut into linguine.

Ready to make the best pasta this side of Tuscany? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A large wooden spoons lifting up cooked fresh spinach pasta from a bowl.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Homemade Spinach Pasta

Homemade spinach pasta takes many pasta dishes to levels you just can't believe. Don't let the dough become too dry, but also incrementally add more flour if too wet. See the video (in the blog post) for visual guidance.
Prep Time1 hour hr
Cook Time3 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 3 minutes mins
Course: Pasta
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 153kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Food processor 6 to 10 cup
  • Pasta roller and cutter

Ingredients

  • 8 oz spinach fresh, washed and stems removed
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¾ cup semolina flour
  • 1 cup all-purpose flour plus more for handling pasta

Instructions

  • Bring a pot of salted water to a boil.
  • Cook spinach for about 2 to 3 minutes, until fully wilted.
    8 oz spinach
  • Drain spinach, when cool enough to handle, press out excess water. Roughly chop with a large knife. Set aside.
  • In a small bowl, add the eggs, olive oil, and salt. Mix together with a fork.
    2 large eggs, 1 tablespoon olive oil, ½ teaspoon salt
  • Add egg mixture to a food processor and pulse a few times. Add the cooked spinach and pulse several times until combined with the egg mixture.
  • With the motor running, slowly add the semolina flour through the tube. Next, add the all-purpose flour. Keep processing, pulsing if desired, until a ball forms. You may need to add more flour if the dough is too wet to form a ball.
    ¾ cup semolina flour, 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • Dust hands with flour, and remove the dough from the food processor. Dust the dough with plenty of flour, and form into a ball.
  • Divide into 4ths, and cover each with plastic wrap, place in the refrigerator, and let rest for 10 minutes.
  • Take the first 4th of the dough, and flatten with your hand into a round disc, dusting with flour if too wet to the touch.
  • Use a rolling pin to flatten the dough into a rectangle.
  • Fold the right side in, and then the left, and roll again to flatten. Repeat this 5 times.
  • Attach the pasta roller to your stand mixer, and place it on the widest setting. If using a manual pasta roller, set it to the widest setting.
  • Carefully lower the dough through the roller.
  • Continue to fold the edges in, like an envelope, for another 5 times, keeping the roller on the widest setting.
  • The dough is now ready for turning into pasta. Move to the next setting (usually the #2 setting) and place the dough through the roller. Move to the next setting (usually the #3 setting). Continue this process until you've reached the desired thickness of the pasta. You may need to cut the pasta sheet in half during this process. If desired, change to the linguine or angel hair attachment, and then cut the pasta.
  • Once ready, place on a baking sheet lined with parchment (or wax) paper that has been sprinkled with semolina (or cornmeal) (this keeps the pasta from sticking to each other). Sprinkle with more semolina. Cover the pasta with a kitchen towel.
  • Repeat the process with each other quarters of the pasta. As one layer is filled on the baking sheet, place parchment or wax paper on the pasta, sprinkle with more semolina, and continue.
  • Once the pasta has been rolled out, bring a large pot of salted water to a boil.
  • Drop the pasta into the boiling water and cook for 3 minutes, or until fully cooked (don't overcook it!).
  • Drain. The pasta is now ready to use in your favorite pasta recipes!

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel.
Baby spinach can be substituted for mature spinach.  In a pinch, you can use frozen spinach, but make sure it is completely thawed and as much of the water is squeezed out of it as possible. 
See the blog post for instructions on storing and drying fresh pasta. 

Nutrition

Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 47mg | Sodium: 186mg | Potassium: 222mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 2726IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg

POST DATE: This recipe was originally published in December, 2013, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in April, 2023!

Homemade English Muffins

April 13, 2023 by Kris Longwell Leave a Comment

Two homemade English muffin halves covered with butter and peach jam with one that has a bite taken out of it.

Baking bread from scratch can be intimidating, no doubt, unless you start with the best ingredients, understand the steps, and have the right tools. This foolproof recipe is no different.

When done right, for so many of us, breakfast is the favorite meal of the day. Perfectly prepared dishes like crispy hashbrowns, blueberry waffles, and fluffy scrambled eggs get only better when served with freshly made bread. These muffins are amazing by themselves, lightly toasted, but they are also the foundation for other iconic breakfast dishes, such as Eggs Benedict or Eggs Blackstone.

Two homemade English muffin halves covered with butter and peach jam with one that has a bite taken out of it.

How To Make Homemade English Muffins

These iconic baked goods may seem too much of a challenge at home. Trust us, though, they honestly aren’t.

You can even prepare the dough the night before serving them and let the dough proof in the refrigerator.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients and Tools You Will Need

To produce English muffins that are crispy on the outside and tender, and chewy, with lots of “nooks and crannies” on the inside, it’s really important that you start with the correct ingredients and use the recommended tools.

Here are the ingredients you’ll need to have on hand

Flour – We use King Arthur all-purpose, but we’ve also used bread flour and had success with it, but all-purpose is great.
Milk – Whole and warm, in the range of 120°F to 125°F, see NOTES
Egg – Room temperature is best
Unsalted butter – Chilled, then cut into cubes, and then allowed to come to room temperature
Sugar – Granulated
Yeast – Instant, or Active Dry (either will work just fine)
Salt – Kosher is what we use
Baking powder – Check the date, and make sure it’s not too old
Semolina flour – If you can’t find it, just omit it and only use cornmeal
Cornmeal – Finely ground. You can also use fresh polenta

Here are the tools you’ll need

3½-inch muffin rings – You could use a tuna can in a pinch, but order the rings, they make a big difference
Griddle – Either cast-iron or electric
Instant-Read Thermometer – Critical for cooking the muffins sufficiently through

EXPERT TIP: Once the dough has come together, you’ll want to form it into a smooth ball and place it in a liberally greased bowl. Cover with plastic wrap and either place in the refrigerator for at least 12 hours, or place in a warm, non-drafty area for 1 to 2 hours. The dough should come close to doubling in size.

A before and after view of unrisen bread dough and then the dough that has doubled in size.

Tips for Perfect Homemade English Muffins

Double-Check Your Yeast – Yeast has a fairly long shelf-life, but it’s too old, it can no longer be active and your dough will not rise sufficiently. Check the date on the package. If has expired, you’ll need to get a new package. This is very important to producing perfect muffins.

Give the Dough Time to Proof – Your dough may not completely double in size, but you should see a definite bulk in size before you proceed with adding the dough into the rings. Our oven has a “proof” setting, which warms the oven space slightly, but not much. 90 minutes is usually all we need. Overnight in the refrigerator is an excellent option, too. If your dough has not had time to proof (rise) sufficiently, you’ll end up with tough biscuits

Cook to 190°F – As you cook the muffins on the griddle, they will brown nicely and get nice and hot, but depending on how thick your muffins are, they most likely won’t reach the optimal internal temperature. Use a thermometer to check the temperature. If they are golden on both sides, but below 190°F, place them on a prepared baking sheet, cover with foil, and bake for another 5 to 10 minutes at 350°F.

Eight uncooked English muffins on a griddle being browned with a thin layer of cornmeal.

How To Serve and How To Store

We recommend allowing the muffins to cool completely before serving.

For optimal taste and texture, we recommend splitting the muffins open in half, and then bake on the “BAGEL” setting or “TOAST” setting on your toaster oven.

The best way to split an English muffin is with your fingers or a fork. Don’t use a serrated knife. This will cause the “nooks and crannies” to compact.

About five homemade English muffins resting on a baking rack.

Other Breakfast Baked Goods Recipes to Try

The uses for homemade English muffins are endless, but here are some other classic baked goods recipes that are ideal for breakfast or brunch:

Southern Buttermilk Biscuits
Biscuits and Gravy
Jelly and Custard Doughnuts
Homemade Cinnamon Rolls
Orange Sweet Rolls
Grandma’s Kolaches
Cinnamon Raisin Twist Bread
Homemade Monkey Bread

Whether you slather butter and jam on these muffins or use them as the base of a classic eggs benedict, you will be amazed at how incredible they are!

An un-toasted English muffin that has been split open and placed on a white plate next to a butter knife.

This recipe truly is foolproof if you are careful to follow each step and be sure to grab the tools you need.

Sure, it’s easy to pick up packaged English muffins from the store, and they’re great. But, folks, there’s just nothing better than homemade.

Make them on a Sunday and enjoy them all week for breakfast! They keep in a tightly sealed baggie for up to 5 or 6 days!

A person using a small knife to smear softened butter on an opened toasted English muffin.

Ready to make the best muffin this side of England? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

Two homemade English muffin halves covered with butter and peach jam with one that has a bite taken out of it.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Homemade English Muffins

Everyone loves a toasty English muffin and making them at home is so much easier than you might think! The muffin rings make a huge difference and can easily be ordered online. See the blog post and NOTE for more info. They are perfect when toasted with a little butter and jam or the foundation of a classic eggs benedict.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time17 minutes mins
Proofing time2 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
Total Time2 hours hrs 52 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast / Brunch
Cuisine: American / English
Servings: 4
Calories: 324kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 8 English muffin/crumpet discs
  • 1 Griddle electric or stove-top (cast-iron)
  • 1 Instant-read thermometer
  • Baking sheet and aluminum foil

Ingredients

  • 2½ cups all-purpose flour
  • ¾ cup whole milk warmed to 120°F - 125°F
  • 1 large egg room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter cubed, room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon sugar
  • 2 teaspoon instant yeast
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • Cooking spray
  • ⅓ cup semolina flour
  • ⅓ cup cornmeal
  • softened butter for greasing the rings

Instructions

  • In the bowl of your stand mixer, add the flour, warm milk, egg, butter, sugar, yeast, salt, and baking powder. Using the paddle attachment on medium-low, mix the ingredients until just combined. Switch to the dough hook attachment and mix on medium-low (#2 setting) for 7 minutes, until the dough is elastic and not sticky to the touch.
    2½ cups all-purpose flour, ¾ cup whole milk, 1 large egg, 1 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 tablespoon sugar, 2 teaspoon instant yeast, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • Remove the dough from the bowl and use your hands to form it into a ball.
  • Liberally grease a large bowl with cooking spray and rotate the dough ball in the bowl to cover it with cooking spray. Lightly spray the top of the dough with a little more cooking spray. Cover tightly with plastic wrap and place in the refrigerator overnight, or in a warm, non-drafty area for 1 to 2 hours, until the dough has nearly doubled in size.
    Cooking spray
  • If the dough has been proofed (rested) in the refrigerator overnight, take it out and let it sit on the counter for at least an hour to become room temperature.
  • In a small bowl, mix together the semolina and cornmeal until combined.
    ⅓ cup semolina flour, ⅓ cup cornmeal
  • Sprinkle a light layer of the semolina/cornmeal mixture over your griddle.
  • Use a paper towel to lightly grease the insides of the rings with softened butter.
    softened butter
  • Turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface. Pinch off 2.5 ounces of the dough (about the size of a golf ball) and use the palm of your hand or a rolling pin to flatten the ball into a thin circle (about ¼-inch thick). Place the circle of dough in one of the buttered rings and place it on the prepared griddle. Repeat with the remaining dough (you should have enough dough for 8 muffins). Cover loosely with plastic wrap and place the griddle in a warm, non-drafty area for 20 minutes.
  • Preheat oven to 350°F. (If proofing the muffins in the oven, don't turn the oven on until you remove them.)
  • Remove the plastic wrap from the muffins and turn the griddle to medium-low (about 275), or place the cast-iron griddle over medium-low heat on the stove. Use your hands to gently move the rings around on the griddle, for even browning. Cook for 7 minutes, and carefully flip them over (the bottoms should be nicely browned). Carefully remove the rings and cook for another 5 to 7 minutes, until both sides are golden brown.
  • Sprinkle more of the semolina/cornmeal mixture over a baking sheet. Place the muffins on the sheet and cover tightly with aluminum foil. Bake for 7 to 10 minutes, until the inside of the muffins reach 190°F.
  • Remove the muffins from the oven and let them cool on a baking sheet.
  • Use your hands or a fork to split the muffins. If desired, toast until lightly browned. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Be sure to check the date on your yeast package. If it's beyond the date, you'll need to get new yeast. You can use Instant (aka Rapid Rise) or Dry Active Yeast. 
See the blog post for a link to purchase the rings. 
Store muffins in a large ziplock baggie or a container with a tight-fitting lid. The muffins will keep for up to 5 to 6 days. They can be frozen for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 324kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 623mg | Potassium: 397mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 229IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 5mg

Creamy Cauliflower Gratin

April 5, 2023 by Kris Longwell 2 Comments

Creamy cauliflower gratin in an oval baking dish with some of it gone.

Creamy Cauliflower Gratin is creamy, cheesy, and loaded with tender pieces of fresh cauliflower. The breadcrumb topping adds a wonderful crunch to the velvety filling. It’s a wonderful side dish for any occasion, but it’s especially fantastic for a holiday feast alongside a slow-cooker spiral ham or oven-roasted turkey.

Creamy cauliflower gratin in an oval baking dish with some of it gone.

🍶Recipe Ingredients

The humble ingredients for creamy cauliflower gratin blend seamlessly to create an irresistible dish that is rich, comforting, and full of flavor, making it a standout side for any meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

A colorful collage of ingredients for creamy cauliflower gratin, featuring fresh cauliflower florets, creamy cheese, butter, heavy cream, garlic, breadcrumbs, and seasonings, all arranged on a wight background.

🧈 Substitutions and Variations

  • Flavor Enhancers – Chopped onions, fresh thyme, and lemon juice don’t add an overpowering taste, but they add depth to the flavor profile. You can substitute dried thyme, but you’ll only need half the amount.
  • Dairy – Butter is ideal for sautéing the vegetables. Olive oil or vegetable oil can be substituted. Gruyére is a creamy cheese that adds depth of flavor, however, you can substitute Swiss, Fontina, or white cheddar. For extra creaminess, we recommend both heavy cream and whole milk. However, you can use only milk, cream, half and half, or a combination of these.
  • Breadcrumbs – Plain Panko adds an amazing crunch to the topping. However, plain breadcrumbs or even fresh bread that you pulverize in your food processor are great, too.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

Expert Tip

We add our cut cauliflower to a large pot of boiling water for about 5 minutes. This softens the cauliflower. If you like cauliflower with a little more “bite” to it, no need to pre-boil. Pour the bechamel sauce directly over the cut cauliflower in the baking dish.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Creamy Cauliflower Gratin

Cauliflower florets being adding to a pot of boiling water from a glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: Bring a pot of water to a boil and stir in the cut cauliflower. Simmer for 5 minutes then drain. 
Chopped onions being sautéed in melted butter in a large skillet.
  1. Step 2: Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Sauté the onions until soft. 
Sautéed onions with fresh thyme being combined with flour in a skillet to create a roux.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the thyme and then the flour. Stir and cook for 2 more minutes. 
A person pour cream into a skillet that has sautéed onions and flour in it.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the milk and cream and cook until thickened. 
A person adding shredded cheese into a skillet that is filled with a creamy sauce.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the seasonings and then the cheese. Stir until just melted. 
A person pouring a creamy cheesy sauce over cauliflower florets that have been arranged in an oval baking dish.
  1. Step 6:
    Add the cauliflower to a butter baking dish and pour the cream and cheese sauce over the top. 

🍞How to Make the Crunchy Topping

A person combing shredded cheese with breadcrumbs in a glass bowl.
  1. Step 7: In a medium bowl, combine 2 tablespoon melted butter with the breadcrumbs. Work the butter in with your fingers or a fork. 
A person sprinkling breadcrumbs mixed with shredded cheese over an unbaked dish of cauliflower gratin.
  1. Step 8: Sprinkle the breadcrumbs combined with grated cheese over the top of the gratin and bake at 400°F until golden. 

🍽️ How To Serve

  • You’ll need the gratin to rest for at least 10 minutes before serving. This is ideal because it gives you time to bring the rest of the feast together.
  • You can cover the dish with foil after it comes out of the oven and it will stay nice and hot for close to 30 minutes.
  • It’s a beautiful dish and is great when presented on the table, just be sure to let guests know that the dish is hot. We serve this dish buffet-style alongside maple-glazed carrots, cloverleaf dinner rolls, and roasted asparagus with egg.

🔥 How To Store and Re-heat

  • Leftovers can be placed in an air-tight container with a lid and refrigerated for up to 5 days.
  • Reheating leftovers in the microwave is fine, or, add them to a baking dish, cover, and heat at 325°F until heated through, usually about 30 minutes.
  • You can also heat leftovers in your AirFryer. Place them in a dish, add a splash of cream (or milk), and air-fry at 350°F for about 10 minutes. This keeps the top crunchy!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can creamy cauliflower gratin be made in advance?

Absolutely! You can prepare the dish 24 hours in advance, waiting to add breadcrumbs just before baking.

Can frozen cauliflower be used for creamy cauliflower gratin?

They can be, but the dish won’t be as flavorful as fresh. Remember, when frozen, they will retain water. Let them thaw completely and use paper towels to dry them as much as possible.

Does creamy cauliflower gratin freeze well?

We don’t recommend freezing the dish. The creamy, cheesy sauce will break after thawing and the texture won’t be ideal.

A serving spoon being raised from a baking dish holding a steaming serving of creamy cauliflower gratin.

😋 Other Creamy Side Dish Recipe

  • An oval baking dish filled with Brussels sprouts gratin with a spoon nestled into the dish.
    Brussels Sprouts Gratin
  • A baking dish filled with a baked leek gratin that has some of it missing and a spoon inserted into the gratin.
    Baked Leek Gratin
  • An overhead view of a large black oval baking dish that is filled with an untouched gourmet green bean casserole that is topped with fried onion strips.
    Gourmet Green Bean Casserole
  • The Ultimate Macaroni and Cheese in a large cast iron skillet with a wooden spoon.
    The Ultimate Macaroni and Cheese

Ready to make one of the most delicious side dishes in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A spoon filled with cauliflower gratin is being raised over a baking dish filled with the same.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Creamy Cauliflower Gratin

This gratin really is over-the-top good. We recommend fresh cauliflower. You'll need either 2 large heads or 3 small/medium heads, about 12 cups after you cut them into medium-sized florets. If using frozen, you'll need 2 lbs, thawed. The recipe can easily be halved. Perfect for a holiday feast side dish!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Resting time10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 10 people
Calories: 440kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9"x13" dish

Ingredients

  • 12 cups cauliflower cut into medium florets (usually, about 3 small/med heads or 2 large)
  • 5 tablespoon unsalted butter divided, plus more for greasing the dish
  • 1 medium onion roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon thyme fresh, chopped
  • 3 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • 3 cups whole milk
  • 2 cups heavy cream
  • 3 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice from 1 lemon
  • 2 cups Gruyère cheese grated. divided
  • 1½ cups panko Japanese bread crumbs

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375°F and bring a large pot of water to a boil.
  • Butter a 9×13 baking dish.
  • Carefully add the cut cauliflower to the boiling water. Stir it around with a wooden spoon. Simmer for just 5 minutes then immediately drain. Set aside.
    12 cups cauliflower
  • Melt 2 tablespoon of the butter in a large saucepan, then add the onion and cook slowly over low heat until soft, 4 to 5 minutes.
    5 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 medium onion
  • Add the thyme and then stir in the flour. Cook, stirring often, for 2 minutes.
    1 tablespoon thyme, 3 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • Slowly add the milk and cream, and whisk until all lumps are gone. Stir with a wooden spoon until thickened, about 5 to 15 minutes (heat the milk and cream before adding to expedite this process). The bechamel sauce should be slightly thicker than the consistency of gravy.
    3 cups whole milk, 2 cups heavy cream
  • Stir in the salt, pepper, and lemon juice. Next, add 1 cup of the cheese and stir until melted.
    3 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 tablespoon lemon juice, 2 cups Gruyère cheese
  • Transfer the cauliflower to the prepared dish and pour the sauce over the top.
  • Melt the remaining 2 tablespoon butter and combine with the bread crumbs and remaining cup of cheese in a medium bowl.
    1½ cups panko
  • Top the cauliflower mixture with the breadcrumb mixture.
  • Bake, uncovered, for 30 to 45 minutes, until bubbly and golden on top.
  • Let rest for at least 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
We recommend using fresh cauliflower but take care when cutting away the core and then cutting it into bite-sized florets. Always cut AWAY from the hand that is holding the cauliflower. Take your time.  If using frozen, you’ll need 2 lbs, thawed, or steamed. 
Be sure to not allow the cauliflower to simmer for too long. 5 minutes is plenty of time, otherwise, it will get too soft and will be mushy and retain liquid that will release during the baking. For al denté cauliflower, skip simmering completely. 
The recipe can easily be halved if not serving a small gathering. 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days and can be frozen (baked, or unbaked) for up to 2 months. Let thaw and then heat in a 375°F until bubbly and heated through. You may need to cover the dish with foil. 

Nutrition

Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 34g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 107mg | Sodium: 1030mg | Potassium: 566mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1278IU | Vitamin C: 60mg | Calcium: 437mg | Iron: 1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in April 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in March 2025.

Mexican Lasagna with Tortillas

April 2, 2023 by Kris Longwell 15 Comments

A close-up view of a Mexican lasagna in a white 9 by 13 baking dish topped with chopped tomatoes and slices of jalapeños.

If you love lasagna and if you love Tex-Mex, then you and your family will flip for this classic casserole!

There are so many things to love about this family-favorite dish. First and foremost, it’s delicious. But it’s easy to put together, and it easily feeds a hungry family. Perfect weeknight fare. We love to serve it with a side of pico de gallo and homemade guacamole! Olé!

A close-up view of a Mexican lasagna in a white 9 by 13 baking dish topped with chopped tomatoes and slices of jalapeños.

How To Make Mexican Lasagna

This is one of our favorite casseroles to make, especially when guests are coming over.

And it never fails to generate lots of accolades every time we serve it. And it’s really not difficult to make!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Many of these ingredients you’ll probably already have on hand. Any other items can be found easily at your local supermarket.

Oil – Olive or vegetable
Onion – Chopped
Ground beef – Can also substitute ground turkey or chicken
Black beans – canned, drained
Sweet corn – Frozen is great, fresh is wonderful, too
Tomatoes with chilis – Ro-tel is best, but there are other brands, too. Usually in the canned tomato section
Taco seasoning – Store-bought is fine, homemade taco seasoning is great!
Beef stock – Or chicken, vegetable, or even water will work
Tortillas – We recommend flour fajita-size, but corn tortillas are wonderful, too
Cheese – Cheddar, Colby Jack, or any Mexican blend is perfect. Shredded.
Sour cream – A full 16 ounces
Green chiles – Chopped. It can be found in the Hispanic section of most supermarkets. Can substitute chopped pickled jalapeños.
Pico de gallo – For garnish, homemade is easy and delicious
Cilantro – Fresh and chopped, for garnish
Jalepeños – Fresh or pickled, sliced, for garnish – optional

EXPERT TIP: If using fajita-sized flour tortillas, for each layer, cut three tortillas in half and arrange them in the baking dish, cut-side facing the edge of the dish. Then place a whole one in the center. You may need to overlap two tortillas in the center on the next two levels (if the sides of your dish are beveled out). Divide the taco meat and cheese into thirds. The sour cream/chili mixture is applied in one layer.

Taco meat ladled onto flour tortillas in a baking dish and then the meat topped with shredded cheddar and then sour cream ladled onto another layer of tortillas.

Tips for a Perfect Mexican Lasagna

Drain the Grease – We like to use lean ground beef for this casserole, but even it will render grease. We don’t recommend leaving the grease in the skillet. Simply tilt the skillet to one side and then use a large spoon to remove it into an environmentally safe vessel. Don’t ever pour grease down the drain!

Watch Your Sodium – Taco seasoning packets are loaded with plenty of sodium, so if using one of those, you won’t need to add any salt to the casserole. If using homemade, you’ll want to add about 1 teaspoon to the taco meat mixture.

Adjust Recipe to Your Family’s Tastes – You can add or omit so many ingredients when making this casserole. We’ve added chopped zucchini and summer squash to the taco meat. For more heat, add chipotle pepper and a little adobo sauce. You could also skip the beans in the sauce and add a layer of refried beans in the lasagna. Be creative! Remember, you can easily half the recipe if desired.

A large cast-iron skillet filled with taco meat that includes black beans, corn, and chopped tomatoes and there is a large wooden spoon inserted into the middle of it all.

How To Serve

One of the things we love about this casserole is that you can make it a day or two in advance of serving. Just assemble, cover with foil, and then keep in the refrigerator until ready to bake and serve.

Use a knife or a spatula to cut the lasagna into squares and let folks serve themselves. We love to provide plenty of toppings for guests to add to their own serving. These include:

Pico de Gallo
Homemade Salsa
Guacamole
Pickled Jalapeños (nachos style)
Freshly chopped cilantro
Chopped onions

NOTE: The perfect side dish for this filling lasagna is Best-Ever Mexican Rice! It’s easy to make and so good! Just look at this lasagna!

A slice of a Mexican lasagna raised up with a metal spatula.

How To Store

We think this lasagna is even better the next day!

Transfer uneaten squares to a container with a lid and keep them in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. Reheat in an oven-proof dish at 350°F until heated through and bubbly, about 20 minutes.

Individual servings can also easily be heated in the microwave on HIGH in 1-minute intervals.

And the casserole can be frozen for up to 2 months, uncooked (or cooked).

A dinner plate filled with a square serving of Mexican lasagna topped with chopped tomatoes and jalapeño slices.

This Mexican casserole is truly the perfect weeknight meal for a busy family, a hungry couple, or any at all, for that matter. And if you love this dish, you’ll most likely flip for our Green Enchilada Casserole with Chicken!

Make it in advance and then enjoy it all week! As mentioned, the recipe can be halved to serve a smaller family.

It’s also so beautiful and scrumptious that it’s spectacular to serve at a Mexican-themed dinner party! Trust us, after one bite, your family and loved ones will be begging for more! It’s that good!

A slice of Mexican lasagna with a bite missing and a fork sitting next to it on a white dinner plate.

A dinner plate filled with a square serving of Mexican lasagna topped with chopped tomatoes and jalapeño slices.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Mexican Lasagna with Tortillas

Mexican Lasagna is sure to please. Loaded with layers of taco meat, cheese, sour cream, and tortillas. It can easily be made in advance and enjoyed all week long. It makes a lot, but it reheats beautifully! Or, you can cut the recipe in half! So good!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American / TexMex
Servings: 12
Calories: 480kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Large skillet
  • 9"x13" baking dish or lasagna pan

Ingredients

For the Meat Mixture

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 2 lbs ground beef
  • 1 15 oz can black beans drained
  • 1 cup corn frozen or fresh
  • 1 15 oz can Ro-tel tomatoes or tomatoes with chiles
  • ¼ cup taco seasoning See NOTES
  • ½ cup beef broth or stock
  • 16 oz sour cream 1 pint
  • 4.5 oz can green chiles
  • 15 flour tortillas fajita-sized, or corn tortillas
  • 4 cups cheddar cheese shredded
  • Pico de gallo for garnish
  • Cilantro fresh, chopped, for garnish
  • Jalapeños pickled, sliced, for garnish - optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.

Make the Meat Mixture

  • Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion and cook until soft, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 cup onion
  • Add the beef and cook, stirring often, until no longer pink. Tilt the skillet and use a spoon to remove most of any rendered grease.
    2 lbs ground beef
  • Stir in the drained beans, corn, Ro-tel, taco seasoning, and stock. Simmer until most of the liquid has evaporated, about 10 to 12 minutes. Set aside.
    1 15 oz can black beans, 1 cup corn, 1 15 oz can Ro-tel tomatoes, ¼ cup taco seasoning, ½ cup beef broth

Make the Sour Cream Mixture

  • In a medium bowl, mix the sour cream with the green chiles until fully combined. Set aside.
    16 oz sour cream, 4.5 oz can green chiles

Assemble and Bake the Lasagna

  • Add ⅓ of the meat mixture into the bottom of a 9"x13" baking dish. Make a layer of tortillas over the meat (see the video for reference). Add another third of the meat mixture. Top with ⅓ of the cheese. Add another layer of tortillas. Top with the sour cream/chili mixture (spread evenly). Add another ⅓ of the cheese. Top with one more layer of tortillas, then the rest of the meat, and then top with the remaining cheese.
    15 flour tortillas, 4 cups cheddar cheese
  • Bake, uncovered, for 25 minutes, or until heated through and bubbly. Remove from the oven and let rest for about 5 minutes. Top with desired garnishes. Slice and serve at once.
    Pico de gallo, Cilantro, Jalapeños

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If you are making the homemade taco seasoning, you'll want to add 1 teaspoon of salt to the meat mixture. If you are using store-bought, no need to add any salt. 
See the video for cutting the tortillas to fit into the dish and making the layers. Corn tortillas can be substituted for flour, if desired.
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days, and the lasagna can be frozen (uncooked) for up to 2 months (let thaw completely before baking). Reheat leftovers in a 350°F oven for about 20 minutes, or microwave individual servings on HIGH in 1-minute intervals until heated through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 480kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 1030mg | Potassium: 278mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1109IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 370mg | Iron: 3mg

Raspberry Linzer Bars

March 29, 2023 by Kris Longwell 5 Comments

Two rows of square raspberry Linzer bars sitting on parchment paper with a vanilla glazed drizzled over the top.

A mix of sweet and tart makes these an instant classic. 

This is one of our favorite desserts to make and serve. Just like a lemon square, they are fruit-forward, but complemented by the most delicious shortbread crust and almond glaze topping. And because they are fantastic served at room temperature, they can be made a day or two in advance!

Two rows of square raspberry Linzer bars sitting on parchment paper with a vanilla glazed drizzled over the top.

How To Make Raspbery Linzer Bars

The beloved Linzer bar has quite an interesting history. The original recipe dates back to 1650 with a Veronese (Verona, Italy) origin, but it became popular in the U.S. when an Austrian world traveler, Franz Holzhuber brought the recipe to Milwaukee, and its popularity quickly spread. Its name comes from the city of Linz, Austria. 

The bars can easily be made in stages, and done well in advance.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ item so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients of this cake are simple and straightforward and easy to find. Many of them, you’ll probably already have on hand.

Here’s What You’ll Need

Flour – All purpose
Sugar – Granulated
Brown sugar – Dark or light (we love the extra molasses flavor in dark)
Salt – Just a pinch
Lemon – Just the zest from the skin, you can still save the lemon for another use
Butter – Unsalted, and chilled
Raspberries – Fresh is best, but frozen will work, too
Cornstarch – For thickening
Confectioners’ sugar – Also known as powdered sugar
Heavy cream – Or half-and-half, or whole milk
Almond extract – Vanilla extract will work, too

EXPERT TIP: It’s important to allow both the crust and the filling to cool before spreading the filling over the crust. Both can still be a little warm, but you’ll have the best results if they have cooled and fully set.

A person transferring a raspberry filling over the top of a partially baked shortbread crust in a metal square baking pan.

Tips For Perfect Raspberry Linzer Bars

Keep the Butter Cold – Butter is a key component for the crust and topping. To help “cut” the butter into the dry ingredients, we highly recommend cubing the butter. Make sure it’s nice and cold, and working one stick at a time cut the stick into strips and then cube each strip. Add to a bowl and then keep chilled while cubing the remaining butter.

Don’t Overcook the Raspberries – Once the raspberries start to cook, they will break down, and if they are fresh, will release their natural juices. Only cook them for about 2 minutes. You want a spreadable sauce, but it shouldn’t be too thin. Also, leaving some of the raspberries intact adds a nice texture to the filling.

Allow To Cool After Baking – The cooked caked should be allowed to cool somewhat before slicing into it. You can cut it right out of the oven, but the filling will still be somewhat runny and the glazed topping will completely melt when added. It’s perfectly fine to serve them slightly warm, however. Chilling the cake in the refrigerator will expedite the cooling process.

EXPERT TIP: When adding the topping, make sure the small cubes of butter are evenly distributed. As the butter melts in the oven, it is absorbed into the dry ingredients and makes a slightly crispy top. If at the end of the bake time, you see powdery dry ingredients in places, use a spatula to spread it into the buttery areas.

A person sprinkling a flour and cubed butter mixture over a metal pan filled with a raspberry filling on top of a baked shortbread crust.

How To Serve and Store

Linzer bars are the perfect mix of tartness with sweetness. But, they are pretty rich. Resist the temptation to cut the squares too large.

If using a 10″x10″ or a 9″x9″ pan, we recommend cutting four rows in both directions. This will yield 16 bars.

The bars will keep nicely in a container lined with parchment or wax paper on the counter for several days. They can be refrigerated for up to a week.

EXPERT TIP: You can drizzle the glaze topping on after you cut them, or directly in the pan. We love to use a spoon to drizzle them over the cooled bars, however, you could also pipe the glaze in a zigzag formation over the entire cake before cutting. The glaze should be thick, but spreadable. If too thin, add more powdered sugar, if too thick, add a little more cream, until it’s just right. It will thicken as it sits, too.

A vanilla glaze is being drizzled from a spoon onto a square raspberry linzer bar sitting next to other linzer bars on parchment paper.

These treats are wonderful any time of the year, and they are so easy to prepare, they are fun to make on the spur of the moment.

But they are always a hit when served for a special occasion. We love serving them as a dessert after a wonderful Easter feast. But, they’re also a perfect sweet treat for showers, birthday parties, or any type of celebration.

Besides being delicious, they are beautiful and very testing.

A close-up view of three raspberry Linzer bars stacked on top of each other on a sheet of parchment paper with other Linzer bars nearby.

Other Fruist-Based Dessert Recipes to Try

We love all kinds of desserts, but those that start with a luscious fruit are spectacular. Here are some of our favorites that you should consider making:

Classic Lemon Squares
Lemon Meringue Pie
Homemade Fruit Tart
Cherry Pie
Blueberry Cobbler
Southern Peach Crisp
Classic Peach Cobbler
Homemade Apple Pie

But for now, aren’t you getting excited about making this delectable dessert?

An overhead view of three rows of Linzer square sitting on parchment paper on a large wooden cutting board.

There is just something addictively scrumptious about this classic dessert.

We have found that even those guests that claim they don’t like raspberries love these gems.

The filling is the perfect match for the buttery shortbread crust and crumbly topping. Dessert perfection!

A close-up view of a raspberry Linzer bar that has a bite taken out of it and is sitting on a sheet of parchment paper.

Ready to make a dessert that’s been satisfying sweet tooths for generation after generation? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag @HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of three raspberry Linzer bars stacked on top of each other on a sheet of parchment paper with other Linzer bars nearby.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Raspberry Linzer Bars

Raspberry Linzer Bars are a classic dessert that has been around for generations...and for good reason! These are a staple in our house, and when you make them, they'll most likely become the same in yours! And, they can be a day or two in advance of serving!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Cooling time1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 50 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American / Austrian / Italian
Servings: 12 people
Calories: 538kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 10"x10" baking pan or 9"x11", or 9"x9"

Ingredients

For the Crust

  • 1½ cups unsalted butter 3 sticks, cold, cut into small cubes, plus extra for greasing (room temp)
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • ¾ cup granulated sugar
  • ¾ cup dark brown sugar packed
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Zest of 1 lemon

For the Filling

  • 4 cups raspberries fresh, 1 lb
  • ⅓ cup granulated sugar
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch

For the Glaze

  • 1½ cups confectioners' sugar aka powdered sugar
  • ¼ cup heavy cream or half-and-half, or whole milk
  • ½ teaspoon almond extract

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Butter a 10x10-inch square baking pan

Make the Crust and Topping

  • In a medium bowl, combine the flour, granulated and brown sugars, salt, and lemon zest.
    3 cups all-purpose flour, ¾ cup granulated sugar, ¾ cup dark brown sugar, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, Zest of 1 lemon
  • Add the butter and, using a pastry blender or 2 forks, cut into the flour mixture until the butter is the size of small peas (you can also use a food processor to do this).
    1½ cups unsalted butter
  • Transfer ¾ of the mixture to the prepared pan and press firmly to make an even layer on the bottom and slightly up the sides.
  • Bake until golden brown, about 15 minutes.
  • Set the crust aside to cool while you make the filling. Chill the remainder of the crust mixture in the fridge.

Make the Filling

  • In a saucepan, stir together the raspberries, granulated sugar, and cornstarch.
    4 cups raspberries, ⅓ cup granulated sugar, 1 tablespoon cornstarch
  • Simmer over medium heat, stirring often, until the sugar dissolves and the berries are juicy, but not completely broken down, about 2 minutes.
  • Transfer to a bowl and let cool.

Assemble and Top with Glaze

  • Spread the raspberry filling over the partially baked crust.
  • Crumble the chilled crust mixture over the filling.
  • Bake until golden and bubbly, about 30 minutes.
  • Let cool completely in the pan on a wire rack.
  • For the glaze, in a bowl, combine the confectioners' sugar, cream, and almond extract. Whisk the ingredients together until combined.
    1½ cups confectioners' sugar, ¼ cup heavy cream, ½ teaspoon almond extract
  • Drizzle (or pipe in a crisscross pattern) over the top of the cake. Serve at once, or store in a container with a tight-fitting lid for up to 5 days.

Video

Notes

See the blog post near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The crust and filling can be made up to several days in advance. Keep covered until ready to assemble and bake.  The entire cake can also be made up to 3 days before serving. 
Fresh raspberries are best, and easy to use for the sauce. If you need to go with frozen, you'll need 1 lb. 
10"x10" pans can be difficult to find. A 9"x9" pan will work, too, with no problems. 
Have a little extra confectioners' sugar and cream on hand when making the glaze. Add a little more sugar if too thin, or a little more cream if too thick. It will keep in the fridge for several days, but you'll need to nuke it in the microwave for a few seconds to thin it enough to make the glaze spreadable. 
We recommend cutting a 10x10 cake into 16 squares (4 rows x 4 rows). Keep in a closed container on the counter for up to 3 days, or refrigerate for 5 to 7 days. They can also be frozen for up 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 538kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 67mg | Sodium: 107mg | Potassium: 125mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 48g | Vitamin A: 795IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in September, 2016, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in March, 2023!

Southern Biscuits and Gravy

March 26, 2023 by Kris Longwell 10 Comments

A plate filled with Southern biscuits and gravy sitting next to a white mug of black coffee and a glass of orange juice.

Talk about the ultimate in breakfast comfort food.

This classic Southern breakfast dish will truly put you on the culinary map when you make it for friends and family. Make the biscuits from scratch and then whip up a batch of this sausage gravy, and you will have one of the most delicious plates of food you ever created.

A plate filled with Southern biscuits and gravy sitting next to a white mug of black coffee and a glass of orange juice.

How To Make Southern Biscuits and Gravy

This iconic dish is actually much easier than you might think.

More on this in a bit, but honestly, what put these in a league all of their own is the homemade biscuits. But the gravy has to be perfect, too.

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There is just a handful of ingredients that are required to make this dish from scratch.

Here’s What You’ll Need

For the Southern Biscuits:
Unsalted butter – Frozen, grated with a box cutter, plus extra for brushing the tops of the biscuits
Flour – Lily Self-Rising is authentic and so good!
Buttermilk – Cold

For the Gravy:
Breakfast Sausage – Cooked and set aside, we usually use about ⅔ of a package (save the extra for other use)
Grease – Saved bacon is perfect. Butter can also be used.
Flour – All-purpose
Milk – Whole
Cream – Heavy, or half and half
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, and adobo

EXPERT TIP: The recipe for the biscuits will yield 7 to 9 biscuits (depending on how big you make them). The recipe can easily be doubled to make more biscuits. You want decent-sized biscuits for the gravy. Don’t roll the dough out too thin before cutting the biscuits. ¾ to 1-inch thick is ideal before baking. Topping them with melted butter adds an incredible taste.

A pastry brush being used to smear melted butter over the top of a Southern biscuit on parchment paper.

Tips for Perfect Biscuits and Gravy

Make the Biscuits from Scratch – We have to admit, the gravy is so flavorful, that if you pour it over purchased biscuits, they’ll still be yummy. But when you make them from scratch, they honestly take the entire experience to another culinary level. And they can even be made the day ahead, just reheat them in the microwave!

Get the Right Gravy Consistency – Your roux (grease with flour) should resemble wet sand. Three tablespoons of each should give you a nice gravy consistency once the milk and cream are added. However, if the gravy gets too thick, simply thin it with milk. Remember, the sausage will thicken the gravy, too, once added.

Provide Options – Some folks may not care for sausage in their gravy. When serving guests, we make two batches, one with sausage and one without sausage. Be careful when adding the sausage. You probably won’t want to add a full pound of cooked sausage. We use about 10 to 12 ounces for the right gravy-to-sausage ratio.

Cream is poured from a small glass bottle into a cast-iron skillet with a roux in it and then cooked sausage is added to the gravy.

How To Serve

Most people enjoy homemade Southern biscuits and gravy, but opinions on how to plate them (or serve them) vary greatly.

Some prefer their biscuits completely buried in the gravy. Some like a little gravy, and on the side.

We find that the best way to serve them is to let guests/family plate them up themselves. You can transfer the gravy (or gravies, if doing two versions – one with sausage and one without) to gravy boats, but we find leaving it in the skillet and providing a ladle or large spoon is best.

A large wooden spoon transferring sausage gravy over homemade Southern biscuits on a black plate.

Other Classic Breakfast Recipes To Try

Biscuits and gravy are always a hit when served to hungry family and friends. But here are a few more that are sure to get rave reviews, too:

Steak and Eggs with Roasted Cherry Tomatoes
Ricotta and Lemon Pancakes with Vanilla Sauce
Grandma’s Homemade Kolaches
Best-Ever Skillet Breakfast
Egg Scramble with Fontina, Basil and Tomatoes
Classic Shakshuka
Grandma’s Homemade Cinnamon Rolls
Authentic Huevos Rancheros
Stuffed Savory Crepes

In the meantime, isn’t this plate of deliciousness calling your name?

A black circular plate filled with a serving of Southern biscuits and gravy.

We honestly have family members who request this dish on a regular basis.

This is a popular dish in the Southern states of the United States, but over the years, it has become a staple at breakfast and brunch establishments all over North America.

Once you take your first bite, especially when everything is made from scratch, you will be a believer. This truly is epic.

A homemade Southern biscuit covered in sausage gravy with a bite take out of it.

Ready to make the ultimate breakfast comfort dish that folks will be raving about for weeks to come? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A black circular plate filled with a serving of Southern biscuits and gravy.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Southern Biscuits and Sausage Gravy

Southern Biscuits and Sausage Gravy is probably the most quintessential breakfast comfort food of all time.  Making the biscuits from scratch is the secret to biscuits and gravy perfection.  And then the rest of just gravy.  Dang good gravy. 
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: Southern, U.S.
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 308kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 6 Southern biscuits Click link for recipe
  • 16 oz breakfast sausage
  • 3 tablespoon bacon grease or vegetable oil, or butter
  • 3 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup whole milk
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon adobo seasoning
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper or more, to taste

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Make a batch of Southern Biscuits (click for complete recipe). 
    6 Southern biscuits
  • In a large skillet, cook the sausage. Transfer to a heatproof bowl and set aside. Wipe out the skillet.
    16 oz breakfast sausage
  • Add the grease (or butter) to the skillet over medium heat. Once hot, stir in the flour and cook for 1 to 2 minutes, stirring often.
    3 tablespoon bacon grease, 3 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • Whisk in the milk and the cream, whisking continuously until no lumps appear. Stir with a wooden spoon until starting to thicken, about 4 to 6 minutes.
    1 cup whole milk, 1 cup heavy cream
  • Add the salt, seasoning, and pepper, and then the cooked sausage (See NOTES).
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon adobo seasoning, 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • Taste and add more salt, if desired.
  • Pour the sausage gravy over the warm biscuits and serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If you don't have self-rising flour, use this formula: For every cup of self-rising flour, substitute one cup of all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking powder, ½ teaspoon salt, and ¼ teaspoon baking soda.
We usually add about ¾ (12 ounces) of the cooked sausage to the gravy and save the rest for another use. We like that ratio of cream to sausage. However, if you prefer more sausage, then add all of it to the gravy. 
The biscuits can be made 1 to 2 days in advance. Gently reheat in the microwave when ready to serve. Store in a covered container. 
Leftover gravy will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days and can be frozen for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 308kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 685mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 1mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in July 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography, and a fabulous new video in March 2023!

Ramen with Spinach and Poached Egg

March 22, 2023 by Kris Longwell 7 Comments

A close-up view of a black soup bowl filled with ramen with spinach and poached egg with a wooden spoon inserted into it.

This is one of our favorite Asian-inspired soups of all time.

Back in our early days, we practically lived on ramen noodle soup. It was cheap, easy, and pretty tasty. We’re going to show you how to elevate that inexpensive package of noodles to a flavor profile that is truly sensational. Make it even better by using homemade chicken broth! And what’s even better, the soup is ready in 30 minutes, or less!

How To Make Ramen with Spinach and Poached Egg

For this recipe, there’s no need to open up the included seasoning packet in the ramen noodles package. They are loaded with sodium, and not what’s needed for this fantastic recipe.

Creating the perfectly poached egg is so much easier than you think!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube Channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

All of the components of this wonderful soup are most likely already in your pantry or can be easily found at your local market.

Here’s What You’ll Need to Have on Hand

Oil – Olive or Extra-Virgin Olive are both great options
Onion – Chopped
Chicken broth – Homemade or store-bought, you’ll need 6 cups
Garlic – Minced
Ginger – Fresh is best, finely chopped
Salt
Ramen noodles – You can toss the seasoning packet – it’s loaded with sodium
Spinach – Fresh is best. Mature rather than baby, but either will work. Frozen will work in a pinch (see NOTES)
Eggs– See below for how to poach
White Vinegar – Helps with poaching
Sesame oil – Can be found in the Asian section at your supermarket
Sriracha – Can be found in the Asian section or the condiments section at your supermarket (it will add some heat to the soup, but not too much)

EXPERT TIP: As mentioned above, we recommend using mature spinach for cooking. Baby spinach is great in salads. However, we’ve used both, and baby will still be just fine. If using frozen (only in a pinch), be sure to completely thaw and then squeeze as much water out of it as possible. For mature spinach, wash thoroughly and then remove the stems. Fresh (and baby, too) will wilt and shrink significantly when added to the hot broth.

A person dropping fresh spinach into a black pot filled with chicken broth and ramen noodles.

Tips for Perfect Ramen with Spinach and Poached Egg

Homemade Broth is Best – This soup is great with quality store-bought broth, but using homemade puts it over the top. You can even make a quick(er) batch by boiling chicken pieces in water for 1 hour, and skimming the top as needed. Remove the chicken, remove the meat, and keep it for another use (or add to the soup).

Fresh is Best – We highly recommend using fresh garlic, ginger, and spinach for the soup. Dried ginger and/or garlic won’t deliver the depth of flavor you want in this soup.

Don’t Forget the Garnishes – The sesame oil and the sriracha add so much flavor to the soup that we don’t recommend omitting them. Srirach definitely will add some heat, so start with a little and then add more to your own tastes. Sesame oil is very flavorful, but a little goes a long way. Try a couple of small dashes, taste the soup, and then add more if desired.

EXPERT TIP: No need to break the noodles up before dropping them into the soup. They will naturally break apart as they start to soften in the simmering broth. Don’t overcook the noodles as they will become very soft and a little mushy.

A person dropping a block of dried ramen noodles into a pot of simmering broth.

How To Poach Eggs with the Vortex Method

To poach the eggs for this soup, you can just drop an egg (or two) into the simmering soup, cover it for a few minutes, and you’ll have a nicely poached egg.

Alternatively, we love to take a separate pot of boiling water and use the vortex method. Simply plunge the handle of a wooden, or metal, spoon into the boiling water and spin around to create a spinning vortex. Crack the eggs into a small container, then add a drop of distilled white vinegar on top, and then gently drop the egg(s) into the spinning boiling water. Immediately turn off the heat, and then wait for 3 to 4 minutes.

Use a slotted spoon to gently remove the beautifully poached egg. Then, carefully add the egg to your bowl of ramen with spinach.

An overhead view of a large black pot filled with ramen with spinach and poached egg.

Other Broth-Based Soups To Try

If you’re not in the mood for a thick, creamy, heavy soup. You’ll want to try out these broth-based soups:

Chicken Pho (Vietnamese Chicken Soup)
Asian-Fusion Soup with Korean Meatballs
Classic Chicken Noodle Soup
Pozolé (Pork and Hominy Soup)
Tortilla Soup with Chicken
Instant Pot Minestrone Soup
French Onion Soup

These are all classics in their own way. But aren’t you excited to give this soup a try? You won’t regret it!

An overhead view of two ramen soup bowls filled with ramen with spinach and poached eggs topped with sriracha sauce.

We love this soup for so many reasons.

First and foremost is the taste. It is just so delicious.

But, it’s also very fast to prepare and easy on the wallet. And every bite is a true taste sensation. And, oh, so comforting!

A small wooden spoon being used to lift ramen noodles out of a bowl filled with ramen soup with spinach and a broken open poached egg.

Ready to make one of the tastiest soups this side of Tokyo? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a black soup bowl filled with ramen with spinach and poached egg with a wooden spoon inserted into it.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Ramen with Spinach and Poached Egg

This ramen soup is amazingly flavorful and comes together wonderfully with sauteed garlic, ginger, fresh spinach, and ramen noodles...topped with a poached egg, sesame oil, and a few splashes of Sriracha sauce! Yum yum yum!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Soup
Cuisine: asian, Japanese
Servings: 2 people
Calories: 586kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon ginger fresh, peeled and minced
  • 6 cups chicken broth or vegetable broth
  • ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ Black pepper
  • 6 oz ramen noodles toss out the seasoning packet
  • 6 oz spinach fresh, washed, dried, and stems removed
  • 1 teaspoon white vinegar
  • 2 large eggs
  • Sesame oil for final drizzle
  • Sriracha optional...for topping off the soup

Instructions

  • In a medium-sized skillet or pot, heat the oil over medium heat.
    1 tablespoon olive oil
  • Add the onion and cook until translucent, about 4 minutes.
    1 cup onion
  • Add the garlic and ginger and cook for another 2 minutes.
    1 clove garlic, 1 teaspoon ginger
  • Add the chicken broth and bring it to a boil. Add in the salt and pepper.
    6 cups chicken broth, ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ Black pepper
  • Add the ramen noodles and cook, stirring to break them apart, until they are tender, about 6 minutes (test one to make sure they are cooked to your liking).
    6 oz ramen noodles
  • Lower the heat to medium and add the spinach and cook until wilted, about another minute.
    6 oz spinach
  • Meanwhile, bring a separate pot of water to a boil. Crack each egg into a small bowl. Top with a small drop or two of vinegar. Use the handle of a large wooden spoon to create a spinning vortex in the boiling water. Carefully transfer the eggs (one at a time) into the spinning boiling water. Turn off the heat and cover the pot for 3 minutes.
    2 large eggs, 1 teaspoon white vinegar
  • Use a slotted spoon to transfer the poached eggs to the pot of ramen, or ladle out the soup into soup bowls and top each with one of the poached eggs.
  • If desired (highly recommended), drizzle a little sesame seed oil and sriracha over the tops of each bowl of ramen.
    Sesame oil, Sriracha

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
We highly recommend using fresh spinach. Mature is best, but baby spinach will work, too. If using frozen, allow it to completely thaw and then squeeze as much water out of it as you can. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days and can be frozen for up to 2 months, although the noodles will break down somewhat. 

Nutrition

Calories: 586kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 200mg | Sodium: 2790mg | Potassium: 562mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1704IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 119mg | Iron: 5mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in February 2019, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in March 2023!

Irish Apple Cake with Vanilla Custard

March 12, 2023 by Kris Longwell 5 Comments

Vanilla custard being poured from a small white pitcher over a slice of Irish apple cake on a white dessert plate.

We love Irish cuisine and we love cake.  That would explain why this cake is one of our all-time favorites.

Naturally, this cake makes an appearance at our house every St. Patrick’s Day. But, honestly, it’s so delicious and always so popular with guests, we make it almost on a monthly basis. It really is the perfect ending to an Irish feast of Guinness Beef Stew, Irish Soda Bread, or Slow-Cooker Coddle. And what’s best, this cake is a snap to make!

Vanilla custard being poured from a small white pitcher over a slice of Irish apple cake on a white dessert plate.

How To Make Irish Apple Cake with Vanilla Custard

There are so many types of apples to choose from when making this cake, but our favorite is the easy-to-find Granny Smith.

This cake comes together very easily. You may be tempted to skip the vanilla custard, but we strongly encourage you to not do that!

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

This recipe is very pantry friendly. Many of the ingredients you very well may already have.

Here’s a Little More Detail on What You’ll Need on Hand

For the Crumble Topping:

Butter – Unsalted, cubed, and cold
Flour – All-purpose
Oats – Rolled, old-fashioned
Sugar – Granulated
Salt – Just a pinch

For the Cake:

Butter – Unsalted, room temperature
Sugar – Granulated
Vanilla extract – Go with a good-quality brand
Eggs – Room temperature
Flour – All-purpose
Baking powder – Check the date and make sure it’s not too old
Cinnamon – Ground
Salt
Milk – Whole is best
Apples – We love Granny Smith, peeled, cored, and thinly sliced

For the Vanilla Custard

Eggs – Just the yolks
Sugar – Granulated
Milk – Whole is best
Vanilla extract – Again, good quality really makes a difference

EXPERT TIP: The batter for the cake will be very thick, this is normal. You’ll need a rubber spatula to spread the batter along the base of the pan. The apples will sit nicely on top of the thick batter and then the crumble topping should be evenly sprinkled over the apples.

A person using a spatula to spread the cake batter in a springform pan and then layering apple slices over it and then sprinkling on a flour and butter crumble.

Tips for a Perfect Irish Apple Cake

Don’t Over Bake – Baking time can vary depending on your oven. Typically, the cake is ready after 55 minutes of baking, or close to it. The crumble topping should brown lightly, but not too much. Also, when a toothpick is inserted into the interior of the cake, it should come out clean and dry.

Choose the Right Pan – A 9-inch springform pan is recommended, but you could make the cake in a regular 9-inch cake pan. You’ll just have to be extra careful when inverting the cake to remove it from the pan as the crumble may fall off the top somewhat. For either, you’ll want to line the base of the pan with parchment paper and then either spray with cooking spray or generously butter it and the sides.

Keep a Close Eye on the Custard – After you temper the eggs with the warm milk, you’ll add it all back to your saucepan. The custard will thicken, but be careful, if the heat is too high, or you cook it too long, the custard will slightly curdle and could even separate. If the custard turns out a little lumpy, strain it through a sieve, and you’ll be just fine.

An overhead view of an untouched Irish apple cake with a pie slicer and a couple of forks nearby.

How To Serve

One of the great things about this cake is that you don’t have to wait for it to cool down before serving it.

While the cake is cooling for only about 15 minutes, you can whip up the vanilla custard.

We love to serve the cake warm, but it is also delicious when served at room temperature.

EXPERT TIP: The cake can be reheated in the microwave (one slice at a time) or in the oven. Gently reheat the custard in a small saucepan over medium-low heat.

A slice of Irish apple cake being raised up the entire cake on a silver pie slicer.

Other Classic Cake Recipes to Try

This has quickly become one of our favorite cakes to prepare and serve. It’s delicious and relatively easy to make. However, here are some other cakes that always receive rave reviews.

Red Velvet Cake
Classic Carrot Cake
German Chocolate Cake
Coconut Cream Cake
Upside Down Pineapple Cake
New York-Style Cheesecake
Sweet Potato Bundt Cake
Classic Chocolate Cake
Christmas Bundt Cake

These are all amazing cakes, without a doubt. But, folks, you may have never heard of Apple Cake. You just have to give this recipe a try.

An apple cake on a white circular cake dish with a triangular slice of the cake missing

How To Store

This cake will keep covered on the counter for up to 5 days. If covered and refrigerated, the cake will keep for up to 1 week.

Be sure to keep the cake in an enclosed cake holder or gently cover it with plastic wrap or foil. The cake will dry out if you don’t do this.

The custard will keep covered in the refrigerator for several days. If refrigerating the cake, be to let it come to room temperature before serving. It’s best at room temperature or heated, not chilled.

A slice of Irish apple cake topped with vanilla custard sitting on a white dessert plate.

Folks, chances are you’ve never heard of this cake before.

We discovered it not too long ago. And, honestly, we don’t understand why it’s not universally loved and prepared.

It’s easy to make. Always popular with family and guests. And is very affordable. What’s not to love about Irish Apple Cake? With one bite, you’ll be asking the same question!

A slice of Irish apple cake with vanilla custard on a white dessert plate with a bite missing and a fork nearby.

Ready to make the best dessert this side of Dublin? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

Vanilla custard being poured from a small white pitcher over a slice of Irish apple cake on a white dessert plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Irish Apple Cake with Vanilla Custard

Irish Apple Cake with Vanilla Custard is perfect in so many ways. First and foremost, it's delicious, but it is also a snap to prepare. Go with your favorite baking apple, but we always use Granny Smith. You could skip making the custard, but we don't recommend that. It puts the cake over the top in yumminess!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time55 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Irish
Servings: 8
Calories: 535kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9-inch springform pan or cake pan

Ingredients

  • cooking spray

For the Crumble Topping

  • ¾ cup all-purpose flour
  • ¼ cup rolled oats old-fashioned
  • ½ cup sugar
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 6 tablespoon unsalted butter cold

For the Apple Cake

  • 8 tablespoon unsalted butter room temperature
  • ½ cup sugar
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 2 eggs
  • 1¼ cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon ground
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 3 tablespoon whole milk
  • 3 apples Granny Smith, cored, peeled, and thinly sliced

For the Vanilla Custard

  • 1½ cups whole milk
  • 6 egg yolks
  • 6 tablespoon sugar
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Line a 9-inch springform pan or a 9-inch cake pan with parchment paper and spray the inside with cooking spray or softened butter.
    cooking spray

Make the Crumble Topping

  • In a medium-sized bowl, mix together the flour, oats, sugar, and salt. Use a knife to cut the butter into cubes and then rub it into the dry ingredients. Place in the refrigerator while you make the cake batter.
    ¾ cup all-purpose flour, ¼ cup rolled oats, ½ cup sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt, 6 tablespoon unsalted butter

Make the Apple Cake

  • Use a stand mixer (or a hand mixer and a large bowl) to mix the softened butter with the sugar (this is creaming the two together) until light and fluffy, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    8 tablespoon unsalted butter, ½ cup sugar
  • Mix in the vanilla, and then beat in the eggs, one at a time.
    2 teaspoon vanilla extract, 2 eggs
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt.
    1¼ cups all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ¼ teaspoon salt
  • With the mixer running, slowly add the flour mixture to the wet mixture. Mix in the milk.
    3 tablespoon whole milk
  • Once the batter has come together (it will be thick), transfer it into the prepared pan. Next, layer the apples over the top of the batter and then sprinkle on the crumble mixture.
    3 apples
  • Bake for 55 minutes, or until the top is lightly browned and an inserted toothpick comes out clean.

Make the Vanilla Custard and Serve

  • Add the milk to a medium saucepan and bring to just a simmer (don't boil).
    1½ cups whole milk
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs with the sugar.
    6 egg yolks, 6 tablespoon sugar
  • Whisking constantly, pour about half of the warmed milk into the eggs/sugar mixture.
  • Transfer back to the saucepan and cook over medium heat, stirring with a wooden spoon constantly, until just thickened (don't overcook!). Stir in the vanilla extract. If the custard is a little lumpy, then strain through a fine-mesh sieve.
    2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Slice the cake and serve with the custard drizzled over the top.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The custard will keep in the fridge for up to 4 days. Gently reheat on the stove over low heat or in the microwave until warm.
The cake will keep covered on the counter for up to 5 days and will keep covered in the fridge for a week. It freezes nicely for up to 2 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 535kcal | Carbohydrates: 70g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 240mg | Sodium: 175mg | Potassium: 215mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 913IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg

Broccoli Cheddar Soup (No Cream)

March 8, 2023 by Kris Longwell 8 Comments

A person raising a spoon filled with broccoli cheddar soup with a broccoli floret sitting on top all over of a bowl of the soup.

There is something about a homemade bowl of soup that is just so comforting. This soup is no exception.

We love this soup for so many reasons. It’s easy to make, versatile, always a big hit, and healthy, but more than anything, it’s just incredibly delicious. Serve this with homemade cloverleaf dinner rolls, and you’ll have a lunch that is truly memorable. An instant home classic.

A person raising a spoon filled with broccoli cheddar soup with a broccoli floret sitting on top all over of a bowl of the soup.

How to Make Broccoli Cheddar Soup

Get a jump on preparing this dish, and make a batch of homemade chicken broth or roasted chicken stock.

You will be amazed at how quickly the soup comes together but delivers just an incredible depth of flavor.

The Ingredients You Will Need

A quick trip to the produce section at the grocery store is all you need to grab the easy-to-find ingredients for this wonderful soup.

Here’s What You’ll Need on Hand

Oil – Olive oil or extra-virgin olive oil are best
Butter – We like the flavor of the butter with the veggies, but you can omit it and go with only olive oil
Leeks – Be sure to wash thoroughly
Carrots – Roughly chopped or sliced, we use our food processor to chop
Celery – Sliced or chopped
Garlic – Minced
Broccoli – We use about 1 and a half heads of broccoli. Save any extra for garnishing and other dishes
Flour – All-purpose flour, helps to thicken the soup somewhat
Chicken broth – Homemade is best, but purchased will work, too
Salt and pepper – Taste as you go, but this soup is best when appropriately seasoned with salt (and not too much pepper).

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to sauté all the vegetables except for the broccoli first, for about 8 minutes, until starting to soften. No need to sauté the broccoli. You’ll sprinkle the flour directly over all of the vegetables and then stir to coat. This will act as a thickener for the soup.

A pot filled with chopped carrots, sliced leeks, and chopped carrots, and then that same pot with flour being sprinkled over the sautéed vegetables including broccoli.

Tips for Perfect Broccoli Cheddar Soup

Fresh Is Best – You’re definitely going to want to use fresh vegetables for this soup. Frozen will not even come close to producing a deeply flavorful soup and the texture will be off. Use a large sharp knife to carefully cut away the florets. Don’t throw out the stems. They are loaded with flavor and nutrients and will purée with ease.

Go with a Good Stock or Broth – The broth in this soup is a critical component for making the flavor profile deeply delicious. To keep the soup completely vegetarian, go with a vegetable broth. If you using chicken broth or stock, seriously consider making the chicken broth (easy) or roasted chicken stock (a little more involved).

Purée to Desired Consistency – Once the stock and vegetables have simmered for 20 minutes, it’s time to purée the soup. We use our handheld immersion blender which is very easy to use. You can also do this, working in batches, in your blender. Just be very careful. The soup will be very hot and you’ll need to secure the top of the blender. Purée very smoothly or slightly chunky depending on your tastes.

Chicken stock being poured into a pot of sautéed broccoli and carrots and then that same pot with an immersion blender that has puréed the vegetables.

How To Serve

This soup is definitely best served piping hot. We love to serve it to guests for a nice brunch or lunch.

Ladle a couple of cups of soup into soup bowls and then top with another small handful of grated cheese and steamed broccoli florets.

For the florets on top of the soup, save about a ½ cup of fresh broccoli florets, and then while the soup is simmering, bring another small pot of water to a boil and then drop the florets into about 1 to 2 minutes. Remove them with a slotted spoon and save them for serving.

This soup is also amazing with sandwiches, like a Classic BLT with Basil Aioli or an Italian-Style Panini.

NOTE: We love all kinds of cheese, but we have to admit, cheddar cheese is our favorite. And it’s perfect for melting in the incredible soup! We go with a block of cheddar and grate it. This is so much better than the bagged shredded variety.

A person dropping a large handful of shredded cheddar cheese into a pot of puréed broccoli soup.

Other Classic Soup Recipes to Try

If you love soup as much as we do, you’ll probably love these recipes, too:

French Onion Soup
Creamy Tortellini Soup with Spinach and Sausage

Creamy Irish Potato Soup
Cream of Mushroom Soup
Homemade Chicken and Dumplings
Roasted Butternut Squash Soup
Instant Pot Irish Guinness Beef Stew
Instant Pot Minestrone
Black Bean and Andouille Sausage Soup
Chicken Tortilla Soup
Rustic Italian Lentil Soup

But in the meantime, just take a look at this incredible soup. Don’t you want to make it now?

An overhead view of a large black pot filled with puréed broccoli soup with a large wooden ladle in the middle of it.

This soup, from start to finish, will take less than an hour to have on the table.

Because there is no cream in the recipe, it freezes beautifully. And honestly, it’s even better the next day.

Simply heat it up on the stove over medium heat until simmering. And the recipe can easily be doubled for serving to a group of hungry guests!

A straight-on view of two soup bowls filled with broccoli cheddar soup topped with shredded melty cheese and broccoli florets.

We love the extra creamy broccoli and cheese soup that you get from Panera Bread and other locations. It’s good, rich, and very fulfilling. And heavy.

Our version truly feels like it has cream in it, but it doesn’t! You could even leave the cheese out and still have an extremely delicious soup that is very low in calories.

No matter what, this is a soup you will want to make time and time again for you and your loved ones. It’s really that good.

An overhead view of two black soup bowls filled with broccoli cheddar soup next to pieces of bread and uncooked broccoli florets.

Ready to make the best soup in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a black soup bowl filled with broccoli cheddar soup topped with melty shredded cheese and broccoli florets.
Print Recipe
4.67 from 3 votes

Broccoli Cheddar Soup

This Broccoli Cheddar Soup recipe is the ultimate in comfort soup. Veggies, broth, and cheddar. It just doesn't get much better than that! So good! Making the chicken stock the day before really puts the soup over the top, but you can use store-bought broth and still get decent results.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Soup
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 326kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large pot

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 leek white and pale green parts, sliced
  • 1 carrot chopped, or thinly sliced
  • 1 celery rib chopped
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1½ heads broccoli stems and tops cut into florets (save some florets for steaming or blanching for garnish)
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 5 cups chicken broth
  • 8 oz cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • In a large pot, preferably a Dutch oven, heat the oil over medium heat until shimmering. Add the butter and stir until melted.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Add the leek, carrot, celery, and garlic. Cook, stirring frequently, until they are tender, about 8 minutes.
    1 leek, 1 carrot, 1 celery rib, 1 garlic clove
  • Stir in the broccoli.
    1½ heads broccoli
  • Sprinkle the broccoli mixture with the flour and mix well.
    ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Stir in the broth and bring to a simmer over medium-high heat.
    5 cups chicken broth
  • Reduce the heat to medium and simmer, with the lid on, but ajar, until the broccoli is very tender, about 20 minutes. Remove form the heat.
  • Purée the soup with a hand-held immersion blender, or very carefully, working in batches, transfer the soup to a blender and purée.
  • Add the soup back into the pot and simmer over medium-low heat.
  • A handful at a time, add the Cheddar cheese to the soup, and let it melt.
    8 oz cheddar cheese
  • Season with salt and pepper.
    2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Serve piping hot topped with a few blanched florets!

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You'll need about 1 and a half heads of broccoli (about 2 lbs). Use both the stems and florets.
We recommend going with quality block cheddar cheese and then shredding it with a food processor (with the shredding attachment) or with a box grater.   
The soup will keep covered in the fridge for 5 days and can be frozen for up to 2 months. Reheat on the stove over medium heat until bubbly and heated through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 1810mg | Potassium: 619mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3397IU | Vitamin C: 138mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in September 2017, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in March 2023!

Classic Spaghetti and Meatballs

March 5, 2023 by Kris Longwell 11 Comments

A close-up view of a white bowl filled with a serving of spaghetti and meatballs with parmesan cheese shredded over the top.

If there was a list of the most beloved comfort dishes in the world, this one would give the #1 position a good run for the money.

Everyone loves a big plate of this, right? Well, most everyone. This recipe is the real deal. Give yourself time to make the homemade marinara, and, of course, the meatballs from scratch, and we promise you’ll have a classic Italian-American dish that will rival any of them out there. It’s really that good.

A close-up view of a white bowl filled with a serving of spaghetti and meatballs with parmesan cheese shredded over the top.

How To Make Classic Spaghetti and Meatballs

We can say, without hesitation, this recipe would be in the top five of our all-time favorite dishes that we have ever made in the How To Feed a Loon kitchen.

It all starts with the homemade marinara sauce, which can be made well in advance. Even the meatballs can be prepared in advance!

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients for this classic dish are not exotic in any way, but they may require a trip to the supermarket.

Here’s What You’ll Need

Beef – Ground, 85% lean is perfect
Pork – Ground, not Italian sausage
Eggs – Lightly beaten
Fresh Bread Crumbs – Our recipe is awesome, but you can use store-bought, no problem
Parsley – Fresh is definitely the best
Basil – Again, fresh, please
Garlic – Minced
Salt and pepper – For the balls and the sauce
Bread slices – Italian or country white slices are perfect, crusts removed
Milk – Whole is ideal
Parmesan cheese – Or Romano, either will work, grated
Marinara – Homemade is a must
Spaghetti – Dried

EXPERT TIP: After you mixed the meatball ingredients together, the mixture will be somewhat sticky. Chill it for about 15 minutes, and then have a bowl of water handy to keep your hands moist to form the balls. 3 ounce balls are ideal.

A person forming an Italian meatball in his hand over a bowl of the meatball mixture.

Tips For Perfect Spaghetti and Meatballs

Chill Time – If possible, use a kitchen scale to weigh your meatballs. 3 ounces make the perfect meatball size. Weighing them ensures they will be uniform in size and all cook evenly. If you don’t have a scale, don’t worry, just be precise when eyeballing them. It’s important to chill the balls once they are formed to help when cooking them. 1 to 2 hours, covered with plastic, in the fridge is perfect (or overnight).

Cooking the Balls – To keep the meatballs as spherical as possible, gently shape them back into a perfect circle before you place them in your oiled non-stick skillet over medium-high heat. Work in batches (3 to 4 at a time). Use a couple of spoons or forks, and a spatula to keep the balls moving around in the skillet. Gently press them to help them keep their shape. See our video for reference.

Pasta and Sauce – Bringing the pasta together with the sauce is critical for making that classic taste and texture. In a large skillet, add about ½ cup of the sauce over medium heat. And then add all of the cooked pasta and toss. Add pasta water (anywhere from ½ to 1 cup) and then plenty more sauce. Keep tossing with tongs until fully coated. For best results, cook the spaghetti to al dente (not too mushy). See package for instructions.

Three Italian meatballs that are being browned in a black nonstick skillet filled with a layer of olive oil.

How To Serve

We have to say that serving this dish family style is our favorite way to present it.

Get a nice big platter or large shallow pasta bowl and transfer the spaghetti and marinara and then strategically place the meatballs all over the top.

Use a grate grater or planer to grate a block of parmesan cheese directly over the meatballs. Or, use store-bought grated Parmesan (or Romano) cheese. Garnish with chopped parsley.

Of course, serving the meatballs separately is always a great option, too. You may have more meatballs than will fit on top of the pasta. Let folks grab as many meatballs as they want.

A white bowl filled with a pile of Italian meatballs sitting next to two glasses of red wine.

Other Classic Italian-American Recipes to Make

It doesn’t get much more classic than spaghetti and meatballs, but here are some other classic dishes that are amazingly delicious and fun to make in your own kitchen:

Baked Ziti
Lasagna Bolognese
White Chicken and Spinach Lasagna
Eggplant Parmesan
Stuffed Shells with Marinara
Pasta Pomodoro
Fettuccine with Creamy Sausage Sauce
Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken
Shrimp Marinara
Shrimp Fettuccine Alfredo
Spaghetti Vongole (White Clam Sauce)
Baked Eggplant Rollatini with Ricotta

Of course, these are all classic and so good, but this right here is about as classic as you will find. It just doesn’t get better than this!

An overhead view of a large pasta bowl filled with spaghetti and meatballs with two glasses of red wine and a board of bread all nearby.

If you want to make a dish that will absolutely delight kids and adults alike, then this classic dish is for you.

Be sure to make the homemade marinara sauce in advance. Give yourself enough time to bring it all together, and you and your loved ones will love the results.

The meatballs are great on their own, over pasta, or in an Italian meatball sandwich. No matter how you cut it, this dish is truly as good as it gets!

A close-up view of a bowl filled with spaghetti and meatballs with one of the meatballs half eaten.

Ready to make the best Italian-American dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a white bowl filled with a serving of spaghetti and meatballs with parmesan cheese shredded over the top.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Spaghetti and Meatballs

Classic Spaghetti and Meatballs are always a sure-fire winner. Make the marinara sauce in advance and be sure to chill the meatballs before browning (they can even be prepared in advance). And then bring it all together in a nice large skillet.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time3 hours hrs
Total Time3 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Course: Italian
Cuisine: Italian, Italian / American
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 528kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large non-stick skillet
  • 1 large pot for simmering
  • Parchment paper

Ingredients

  • 8 cups marinara sauce

For the Fresh Italian Breadcrumbs

  • 2 slices white bread crusts removed and torn into pieces
  • 2 tablespoon Parmesan cheese grated
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon parsley fresh, chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon Salt
  • Pinch pepper

For the Meatballs

  • 3 slices white bread crusts removed (let them sit out for about an hour)
  • 1 cup whole milk
  • 1½ lb beef ground, 85% lean
  • ½ lb pork ground
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • ¼ cup Italian bread crumbs see recipe below
  • 3 tablespoon parsley fresh, chopped, plus more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoon basil fresh, chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup Parmesan cheese grated, or Romano, plus more for garnish
  • 2 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil for searing the meatballs
  • 1 lb dried spaghetti

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Make the marinara sauce (see the link for the recipe in the Ingredients list)
    8 cups marinara sauce

Make the Italian Breadcrumbs

  • Process the bread in a food processor until coarsely ground. Add the rest of the ingredients and pulse until finely ground. Set aside.
    2 slices white bread, 2 tablespoon Parmesan cheese, 2 cloves garlic, 1 teaspoon parsley, 1 teaspoon dried oregano, ¼ teaspoon Salt, Pinch pepper

Make the Meatballs

  • Tear the bread into pieces and place it in a bowl. Add the milk and let it sit for a few minutes to fully absorb. Set aside.
    3 slices white bread, 1 cup whole milk
  • In a large mixing bowl, use your hands to mix together the beef, pork, and eggs. Now add the Italian breadcrumbs, parsley, basil, salt, garlic, and pepper. Mix well.
    1½ lb beef, ½ lb pork, 2 large eggs, ¼ cup Italian bread crumbs, 3 tablespoon parsley, 2 tablespoon basil, 2 cloves garlic, 1 cup Parmesan cheese, 2 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon pepper
  • Squeeze the milk-soaked bread and add to the meat mixture. Add the Parmesan cheese, and mix until fully combined.
  • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and place it in the fridge for about 15 to 20 minutes.
  • Remove the meat mixture from the refrigerator. Fill a small bowl with water and have it near the meat mixture. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or wax paper). Wet your hands and pull enough of the meat mixture to form a ball with your hands slightly larger than a golf ball, approx. 3 oz. Place the ball on the parchment paper-lined baking sheet and continue with the remaining meat mixture. You should yield about 15 to 17 meatballs. Cover with plastic wrap and place in the refrigerator for at least 1 hour, preferably 2, or longer.
  • Heat the olive oil (2 tbsp) in a non-stick skillet over medium-high heat. When the oil is shimmering, and working in batches, add 3 or 4 meatballs and cook them for about 10 minutes, carefully turning them frequently until they are browned on all sides. Use a couple of forks or spoons to help maintain a spherical shape as they brown. Transfer to a platter and continue until all balls have been browned. Set aside. (They will still be pink in the center - they will finish cooking while simmering in the marina.)
    2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Meanwhile, in a large pot, heat the marina over medium heat.
    8 cups marinara sauce
  • Slowly, and carefully, add the meatballs and any accumulated juices to the marina. Simmer for 45 minutes to 2 hours. Watch the pan, gently stir often, and don't let the bottom of the pan burn!

Bring It All Together

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, and cook the spaghetti until al dente, about 10 - 11 minutes.
    1 lb dried spaghetti
  • Reserve about a cup of the pasta water, and then drain the pasta.
  • Heat a large, heavy skillet over medium-high heat, add about a cup of the sauce.
  • Add the cooked pasta, and incorporate the sauce so it coats the pasta. Add a little of the pasta water to loosen the pasta.
  • Add more sauce, stir, and add more pasta water if needed. Transfer to a serving platter. Add meatballs to the top, and pass with extra sauce.
  • Top with grated Parmesan cheese and chopped parsley, if desired. Serve at once.

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The marinara sauce can be made up to 5 days in advance (keep covered in the fridge) or freeze for up to 2 months.
The meatballs can also be done in advance. Brown them and then refrigerate them (up to overnight). Place cooked meatballs in the marinara and simmer for at least 1 hour.
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. The meatballs freeze nicely and can be frozen for up to 2 months. Let thaw completely and then heat in an oven-proof pot or dish, covered, with a cup or two of the sauce over the top. Bake at 350°F for 30 minutes, or until heated through.  

Nutrition

Calories: 528kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 102mg | Sodium: 2100mg | Potassium: 1530mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 1917IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 432mg | Iron: 7mg

POST UPDATE: This recipe was originally published in July 2015, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in March 2023!

  • « Previous Page
  • 1
  • …
  • 5
  • 6
  • 7
  • 8
  • 9
  • …
  • 21
  • Next Page »

Welcome!

Kris & Wesley (The Loon) live for fun, food, and fabulousness. "How to Feed a Loon" is a celebration of just that. Come join us on this joyous culinary ride.

More about us

Soups & Stews

  • Two sourdough bread bowls filled with Broccoli Cheddar Soup resting on small plates with a glass of iced tea nearby.
    Broccoli Cheddar Soup (Panera Copycat)
  • An overhead view of a white soup bowl filled with Classic Ham and Bean Soup (With Navy Beans) sitting on a white plate with a gold spoon resting nearby.
    Classic Ham and Bean Soup (with Navy Beans)
  • An overhead view of two bowls on a wicker placemat and that are filled with servings of homemade Chinese sweet and sour soup with wooden spoons flanking each bowl.
    Homemade Chinese Hot and Sour Soup
  • An overhead view of a large white pot filled with chorizo and bean soup with a wooden spoon in the middle of the soup.
    Chorizo and Bean Soup
  • Two soup bowls filled with creamy Irish potato soup topped with crumbled bacon and snipped chives.
    Creamy Irish Potato Soup
  • A straight-on view of two colorful Asian soup bowls filled with servings of udon soup with pork topped with hard boiled eggs and chopped scallions.
    Udon Noodle Soup with Pork
See more Soups →

Popular Recipes

  • A white soup filled with roasted tomato basil soup next to sliced grilled cheese sandwiches.
    Roasted Tomato Basil Soup
  • best-ever chicken salad recipe
    Best-Ever Chicken Salad
  • A close-up view crispy Southern crab beignets sitting on a white platter next to a small bowl of white remoulade sauce.
    Southern Crab Beignets
  • A lemon wedge being squeezed onto a platter of chicken francese
    Chicken Francese
  • this is a baked jumbo crab au gratin in mini cast iron skillets
    Jumbo Lump Crab Au Gratin
  • Sautéed white beans with garlic and sage in a large skillet with wooden spoon
    Sautéed White Beans with Garlic, Sage and Tomatoes

Footer

↑ back to top

Explore

  • Recipe Index
  • About Us
  • Subscribe

About

  • Privacy Policy
  • Contact

Copyright © 2025 How to Feed a Loon • This website contains affiliate links, which means that if you click on a product link, we may receive a commission in return. How To Feed a Loon is a participant in the Amazon Services LLC Associates Program, an affiliate advertising program designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees by advertising and linking to Amazon.com.

Rate This Recipe

Your vote:




A rating is required
A name is required
An email is required